Toshiba E Studio 170f User Manual
EPA ENERGY STAR®  
The United States Environmental ProtectionAgency (EPA) has introduced a voluntary program, the ENERGY  
STAR Program, to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of energy-efficient technologies that enhance the  
workplace, improve product performance, prevent pollution, and reduce your energy costs. As an ENERGY  
STAR Partner, Toshiba has determined that this facsimile model meets the ENERGYSTAR guidelines for energy  
efficiency. ENERGYSTAR guidelines require that all ENERGYSTAR facsimiles maintain very low power  
consumption during idle state or have a "Power Saver" feature that will automatically stand-down to an idle state  
after a period of inactivity.  
For more information on the ENERGYSTAR Program, please contact:  
ENERGYSTAR Printers/Fax Machines  
US EPA (6202J)  
Washington, DC 20460  
ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered mark.  
NOTICE TO USERS  
Read through this manual before using the machine. Keep the manual in a convenient location so that you may refer to the manual whenever necessary.  
Warning:  
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.  
1 Do not touch the connector terminal when disconnecting the cables of peripheral equipment.  
2 Before opening any covers or removing any parts from the copier, discharge the static electricity from your body by touching a metal part of the copier. This product  
is carrying the CE-Mark in accordance with the related European Directives. Responsible for CE-marking is TOSHIBA TEC GERMANY IMAGING SYSTEMS GmbH,  
Carl-Schurz-Str. 7, 41460 Neuss, Germany.  
E-mail: [email protected]  
Machine Noise Information  
Ordinance3. GSGV, January 18, 1991: The maximum sound pressure level is equal to or less than 70dB (A) according to EN27779.  
1
LASER SAFETY INFORMATION  
This facsimile does not produce laser radiation hazardous to the user. It is certified  
as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S Department of Health and Human Ser-  
vices (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control  
for Health and Safety Act of 1968.  
Protective housing and external covers completely confine the laser light emitted  
inside the facsimile. The laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any  
phase of user operation.  
4122-1496  
Regulations implemented on August 2, 1976 by the Bureau of Radiological Health  
(BRH) of the U.S Food and Drug Administration apply to laser products manufac-  
tured from August 1,1976. Laser products marketed in the United States must com-  
ply with these regulations.  
Caution:  
Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures, other  
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation ex-  
posure.  
2
CONTENTS  
USER INTERFACE OPERATION ..........................................35  
Menu Operation .....................................................................................35  
Character Entry......................................................................................36  
NOTICE TO USERS................................................................1  
LASER SAFETY INFORMATION ..........................................2  
FEATURES ............................................................................7  
CARE AND MAINTENANCE.................................................8  
INITIAL SETUP ......................................................................38  
Initial Setting Summary..........................................................................38  
Language Selection ...............................................................................39  
Date andTime Setting ...........................................................................40  
Terminal ID Setting.................................................................................42  
DialType Setting ....................................................................................44  
INTRODUCTION......................................................... 9  
FACSIMILE UNIT DESCRIPTIONS .......................................9  
FrontView ..............................................................................................9  
RearView ..............................................................................................10  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION ...................................................45  
Configuration Summary..........................................................................45  
RingerVolume Adjustment .....................................................................46  
AlarmToneVolume Adjustment ..............................................................47  
KeyTouchToneVolume Adjustment .......................................................48  
MonitorVolume Adjustment ...................................................................49  
Power Saver Operation ..........................................................................50  
Department Code Setting.......................................................................52  
Department Code Maintenance ..............................................................54  
Account Codes Setting ..........................................................................56  
Line Monitor Default Setting ...................................................................57  
Receive Interval Setting Operation.........................................................58  
ECM Default Setting ..............................................................................59  
Sort Copy Setting ..................................................................................60  
Setting Redial (Interval and Counter) ......................................................61  
Reception Mode Default Setting .............................................................62  
Copy Reduction Setting .........................................................................64  
OPERATION PANEL..............................................................12  
SETUP......................................................................... 15  
UNPACKING ..........................................................................15  
Unpack the Carton .................................................................................15  
Make Sure All Items are Enclosed.........................................................15  
Select a Desirable Location ...................................................................16  
FACSIMILE MACHINE INSTALLATION ................................17  
ConnectingYourTOSHIBA Facsimile .....................................................17  
Recording Paper ExitTray ......................................................................18  
Document Support .................................................................................18  
Document Exit Tray................................................................................18  
Recording PaperTray .............................................................................19  
Bypass Tray ...........................................................................................19  
INITIAL PRINTING SUPPLIES INSTALLATION ...................20  
Recording Paper Installation (Recording PaperTray) ...............................20  
Recording Paper Installation (BypassTray) ............................................23  
Recording Paper Installation (Optional Recording PaperTray) .................24  
Drum Unit andToner Cartridge Installation .............................................27  
BASIC FUNCTIONS ................................................... 65  
AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE DIALING ....................................65  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration ..............................................................65  
OneTouch Dialer Registration ................................................................71  
Group Number Registration ....................................................................77  
PRINTING SUPPLIES REPLACEMENT ...............................29  
Toner Cartridge Replacement .................................................................29  
Drum Unit Replacement .........................................................................31  
TRANSMIT CONFIGURATION ..............................................81  
Document Specifications .......................................................................81  
Document Loading .................................................................................82  
Scan Resolution Setting.........................................................................83  
Contrast Setting .....................................................................................84  
QUICK START .......................................................................34  
Terminal ID.............................................................................................34  
Transmitting ...........................................................................................34  
Receiving ...............................................................................................34  
3
Default Setting for Document Mode (Resolution and Contrast) ...............85  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS .......................................... 108  
COPYING ...............................................................................86  
Paper Size for Copying ..........................................................................86  
Copying Procedure.................................................................................87  
MULTI-ADDRESS TRANSMISSION (BROADCASTING) .....108  
Group BroadcastTransmission...............................................................108  
Multi-Key Quick BroadcastTransmission ...............................................109  
DIALING METHODS ..............................................................89  
OneTouch Key Dialing ...........................................................................89  
Abbreviated Dialing ................................................................................90  
Alphabet Dialing .....................................................................................91  
Keypad Dialing .......................................................................................92  
RELAY TRANSMISSION........................................................111  
RelayTransmission, Relay-RelayTransmission Overview ......................111  
RelayTransmission Originating Procedure .............................................112  
POLLING & MAILBOX COMMUNICATIONS.........................114  
Polling & Mailbox Overview....................................................................114  
Polling Reservation ...........................................................................114  
Polling Reception ..............................................................................114  
Open Mailbox (ITU-T Compatible) .....................................................115  
Simple & Security Polling Reservation ...................................................116  
Multi Mailbox Polling Reservation...........................................................119  
Simple & Secure Polling.........................................................................121  
Multi-Address Polling .............................................................................123  
TRANSMITTING.....................................................................93  
MemoryTransmission ............................................................................93  
MemoryTransmission Procedure ......................................................94  
DirectTransmission ................................................................................95  
Direct Transmission as Default Setting ..............................................95  
Temporary DirectTransmission..........................................................97  
On-hookTransmission (Monitor Speaker Dialing) ..............................98  
External Off-hookTransmission  
MAILBOX (ITU-T Compatible) ...............................................125  
Setting Up a Mailbox..............................................................................125  
Deleting a Mailbox .................................................................................127  
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub) ...................................129  
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub) ....................................131  
Retrieving (Polling) a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub)...............133  
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub)....................................135  
Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox (Local Hub).....................................137  
(Transmission Using an ExternalTelephone) .....................................99  
Redialing ................................................................................................100  
Automatic Redialing ..........................................................................100  
Manual Redialing DirectTransmission ...............................................100  
Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory ....................................................101  
RECEIVING ............................................................................102  
Automatic Reception Mode ....................................................................102  
FAX/TAD Switching Mode ......................................................................102  
TEL/FAX Auto Switching Mode ..............................................................103  
Manual Receiving Mode .........................................................................103  
Selecting the Reception Mode ...............................................................104  
Recording Paper Size.............................................................................104  
ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS .........................139  
Department Code Access ......................................................................139  
Account Code Entry...............................................................................140  
Chain Dialing..........................................................................................141  
Default Setting for MemoryTransmission ...............................................142  
Default Setting for Security Transmission ...............................................143  
Cover Sheet Registration .......................................................................144  
Setting RecoveryTransmission ..............................................................145  
TTI (TransmitTerminal ID) Print ..............................................................146  
Send after Scan Default Setting .............................................................148  
Document Length Setting.......................................................................149  
PIN Mask ..............................................................................................150  
COMMUNICATION STATUS..................................................105  
Current Job Status .................................................................................105  
Communication Journal..........................................................................105  
CANCELLING A COMMUNICATION JOB ............................106  
Cancelling a DirectTransmission............................................................106  
Cancelling a Job Reservation .................................................................106  
4
Reservation List .....................................................................................189  
Multi-AddressTransmission Report ........................................................190  
Multi-Polling Report ................................................................................191  
Relay Send Originator Report ................................................................192  
Mailbox Reception Report ......................................................................193  
Mailbox (ITU-T Compatible F-code Communication) List ........................194  
Department Control List .........................................................................195  
Preset Dialing Number Lists...................................................................196  
All of Lists ........................................................................................196  
Abbreviated Dial Number List............................................................197  
OneTouch Number List .....................................................................198  
Group Number List ............................................................................199  
Address Book List ............................................................................200  
Function List .....................................................................................201  
Menu List..........................................................................................202  
Power Failure List...................................................................................203  
ADVANCED RECEPTION FUNCTIONS ............................... 151  
Secure Reception Access Code Setting ................................................151  
Secure RX Activation Period Setting ......................................................153  
Memory Reception Setting .....................................................................155  
Reception-Reduction Setting ..................................................................156  
Reception-Discard Setting......................................................................157  
Reverse Order Printing Setting...............................................................158  
Privileged Reception ..............................................................................159  
RTI (RemoteTerminal ID) Print...............................................................160  
Secure RXTemporary Stop ....................................................................161  
TRANSMISSION OPTIONS ...................................................162  
SecurityTransmission ............................................................................162  
Disabling ECMTemporarily ....................................................................163  
Dialing with Sub-Address .......................................................................164  
Enabling or Disabling Send after ScanTemporarily.................................166  
Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet .......................................................168  
Delayed Communication (Time Designation) ..........................................170  
PriorityTransmission ..............................................................................171  
Sending RecoveryTransmission ............................................................172  
Low SpeedTransmission ........................................................................174  
Line Monitor ...........................................................................................175  
Setting the Page Count ..........................................................................176  
Communication Report Print ..................................................................177  
TROUBLESHOOTING................................................ 204  
Error Messages .....................................................................................204  
Paper Jam Error Codes ..........................................................................206  
Error Codes Printed on Reports .............................................................207  
Transmission Problems ..........................................................................208  
Reception Problems...............................................................................209  
Clearing a Document Jam ......................................................................210  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam ............................................................211  
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... ...............................................215  
Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure ............................................215  
Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure ...................................................217  
LISTS AND REPORTS............................................... 178  
LIST AND REPORT OPTIONS SETTING .............................178  
Reception Journal Settings ....................................................................178  
DirectTransmission Report Setting ........................................................180  
MemoryTransmission Report Setting.....................................................181  
Multi-Address Report Setting .................................................................182  
Multi-Polling Report Setting....................................................................183  
Relay Originator Report Setting..............................................................184  
Reception List Settings ..........................................................................185  
USER TEST MODE..................................................... 218  
AUTOMATIC TEST MODE .....................................................218  
AUTOTEST ...........................................................................................218  
INDIVIDUAL TEST MODE ...................................................... 219  
INDIVIDUALTEST Summary .................................................................219  
ADF TEST .............................................................................................220  
KEY TEST .............................................................................................222  
LEDTEST .............................................................................................223  
LCDTEST .............................................................................................224  
SPEAKER TEST ...................................................................................225  
LIST AND REPORT PRINT FORMAT AND  
PRINTING PROCEDURE ...................................................... 186  
Transmission/Reception Journal (Communication Journal) .....................186  
Transmission Report ..............................................................................187  
MemoryTransmission Report .................................................................188  
5
SENSORTEST .....................................................................................226  
PRINTTEST..........................................................................................228  
TONER ICTEST ....................................................................................229  
TEST RESULT .......................................................................230  
PRINTING aTEST RESULT ..................................................................230  
REMOTE SERVICE .................................................... 231  
AUTOMATIC SUPPLIES ORDER ..........................................231  
Automatic Supplies Order Setting ..........................................................231  
SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................... 232  
SUPPLIES................................................................... 233  
HARDWARE OPTIONS.............................................. 233  
INDEX .......................................................................... 235  
6
FEATURES  
Super G3 High-speed Communications  
Substitute Memory Reception  
Provides state-of-the-art V.34 modem technology for worldwide compatibility at  
speeds up to 33,600 bits per second.  
When the recording paper or supplies have been depleted or in the event of a  
recording paper jam, your receptions will be safely stored in memory until the  
problem is corrected.  
High Resolution, 128 Level Halftone  
With a maximum resolution of 16 dots/mm x 15.4 lines/mm (406 DPI x 391 LPI)  
and 128 level halftone, precision drawings, small-size characters, photographs,  
etc. are copied, sent, and received with exceptional clarity.  
Memory Release  
Minimizes the potential for memory overflows when connected with a remote lo-  
cation. After each page has been successfully transmitted it is released from  
memory to make room for subsequent pages.  
Open Network Mailbox Systems  
TOSHIBA Viewer  
Your new Toshiba provides ITU-T F-code communication for Open Mailbox op-  
eration.  
Installing the TOSHIBA Viewer software that comes with the machine enables  
following functions (refer to “OPERATOR’S MANUAL FOR TOSHIBA Viewer”).  
Rapid Scan Document Scanning  
• 600 dpi plain paper laser printer  
PC print jobs are printed on plain paper at a crisp 600 dpi print resolution.  
Allows letter sized originals to be scanned into memory in as little as 3 seconds  
per page.  
• Setting and programming the machine from a PC  
You can set up and program the machine from a PC.  
38 Programmable One Touch Autodialer Keys  
Allows remote locations to be quickly dialed at the touch of a key saving time  
and eliminating mis-dialed phone numbers.  
• PC Scanner function  
The machine can be used as a Twain compatible B/W image scanner (16  
dots/mm x 15.4 dots/mm max.).  
150 Abbreviated Autodial Locations  
In addition to the 38 One Touch Autodialer Keys, 150 abbreviated locations can  
also be programmed with other frequently called locations. These locations can  
then be easily accessed using abbreviated codes ranging from 001 to 999.  
User Test Mode  
The user test mode can help you to find the cause of a machine problem should  
a failure occur.  
5 Function Keys  
Five frequently used functions are assigned to the keys located on the top of  
One Touch Index Panel. These keys allow direct access to frequently used  
function settings and operations.  
Auto Supply Order Function  
This function allows the machine to order supplies (Drum Unit and Toner Car-  
tridge) automatically.  
Multi-address (Broadcast Transmission)  
This feature allows the transmission of a document to multiple remote units with  
one operation sequence. Locations may be selected using the autodialer or in-  
frequently dialed locations that have not been preregistered.  
Multi-Memory Access Operation  
Allows up to 4 operations such as transmission or reception, printing, scanning,  
and programming to be performed at the same time.  
Super Energy Saver Mode  
Reduces power consumption to approx. 2W by turning all unnecessary functions  
off in the standby mode.  
7
CARE AND MAINTENANCE  
Do not Place the Unit in the Following Environments  
About Power for the Unit  
•
•
This unit requires 220 V AC, 50/60Hz electric power. This unit should not be  
used in countries that do not conform to these domestic power provisions.  
Do not place this facsimile unit in the environments described below.  
•
Where temperature is excessively high, such as places close to heaters, radia-  
tors, direct sunlight, etc.  
Insert the power cord plug firmly to the wall outlet, then insert the other end of  
the cord into the receptacle on the machine. If it is not firmly connected, the unit  
will not operate normally. When unplugging the unit, grasp by the plug and not  
the cord.  
•
•
•
•
•
Where the temperature can become excessively low.  
Where water or any chemicals may come in contact with the unit.  
Where the humidity is too high.  
•
•
Do not share one outlet with too many electric appliances. This may create a fire  
hazard.  
Where dust, dirt, metal filings, or hazardous gases may exist.  
When the possibility of lightning arises, unplug the power cord from the wall out-  
let. Also, unplug the phone cord from the facsimile unit. This prevents possible  
damage from lightning striking power or phone lines.  
Near equipment with strong magnetic fields, such as a radio’s, TV’s, audio  
amplifier’s, speaker’s, or other electric appliances.  
•
•
Where condensation may easily result, i.e., an environment subject to sudden  
temperature changes, such as places close to an air-conditioner or heater.  
•
•
Avoid sharing the electrical wall outlet with other equipment that may cause  
power surges (air-conditioners, large copiers, etc.). Power surges may cause the  
unit to malfunction.  
Where vibrations frequently occur. (Provide a space of 4 inches or more be-  
tween the rear side of the unit and the wall.)  
Do not step on the power cord, and do not place anything on it.  
Other Remarks  
When a Power Failure Occurs  
•
•
In the event of a power failure, neither facsimile nor telephone functions of the  
unit are available.  
•
Do not disassemble or modify the facsimile unit. This may result in electric  
shock, hazard or machine malfunction.  
In the event a power failure occurs (or the power to the unit has been discon-  
nected), functions and unit operation will not be possible. Any document data  
stored in memory will be retained for a period of approximately 30 minutes (if the  
internal battery is fully charged). On exceeding that time limit, the following  
items will be erased:  
•
•
Keep fire sources away from the facsimile unit. This may create a fire hazard.  
Keep paper clips and staples away from the unit. If metal objects fall in the unit,  
they may damage the machine.  
•
•
•
•
•
Avoid opening the unit while it is scanning or printing. The operation will stop and  
it may cause a malfunction and/or damage.  
•
Document data stored in memory for Transmission, Substitute Memory Re-  
ceptions, etc.  
Do not drop, hit, or apply excessive shocks to the unit, as this may result in  
damage to the unit.  
•
The address and designated time of each Timer Transmission, Timer Polling  
Reception, etc.  
When using international or discount communications services, communication  
reliability may be impaired.  
•
•
Programmed data such as the clock, Auto Dial Numbers and user configurations  
will not be erased. This data is supported by second battery with a maximum  
five year life (from time of manufacture).  
Use of non authorized parts or supplies may result in damage to the unit and  
could result in termination of the service or warranty agreement.  
In the event that document data has been erased  
due to a power failure, the message “POWER  
FAILURE” is displayed on the LCD as shown to  
If any abnormal conditions occur, such as emitting of smoke or burning odor,  
immediately disconnect power to the unit and contact your authorized Toshiba  
dealer for service.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 99%  
POWER FAILURE  
the right and a Power Failure Report is issued  
once the power is restored (see page 203).  
8
INTRODUCTION - FACSIMILE UNIT DESCRIPTIONS  
Front View  
Document Guides  
Adjust the guides to the edges of  
the document to help ensure  
proper document alignment and  
Recording Paper  
Exit Tray Extension  
smooth feeding. (See page 82.)  
Supports long recording  
paper after printing.  
Recording Paper Exit Tray  
Stacks recording paper after  
printing.  
Operation Panel  
Used to perform programming  
and operation of the facsimile  
machine. (See page 12.)  
Document Support  
Place documents face down on  
this tray to transmit or copy.  
(See page 82.)  
Document Exit Tray  
Stacks the original  
documents after scanning.  
Document Support Extension  
Supports long original documents  
to transmit or copy.  
Document Exit Tray Extension  
Supports long original documents  
after scanning. (See page 82.)  
Operation Panel Release Position  
Provides access to the document  
scanner area for periodical cleaning or  
clearing jammed originals. Grasp the  
center of the Control Panel and pull  
forward to open. (See page 210.)  
Recording Paper Tray  
Bypass Tray  
Holds up to 250 sheets of  
Load a sheet of recording  
recording paper.  
paper. (See page 23.)  
(See page 20.)  
9
Rear View  
External Telephone  
Connector  
Connection for an External  
Telephone set.  
(See page 17.)  
Line Connector  
Connection for the telephone  
line cord from wall or PSTN  
system. (See page 17.)  
AC Inlet  
USB Interface  
This interface is used for connection  
to personal computers for Scanning,  
Printing and programming various  
settings from PC.  
10  
When the Optional Recording Paper Tray is Installed  
With the Optional Recording Paper Tray Installed  
Lower Recording  
Paper Tray (Optional)  
Upper Recording  
Paper Tray  
11  
- OPERATION PANEL  
1. One Touch Keys  
6. INSERT Key  
Allows remote locations to be dialed at the touch of a button (see page 89).  
This key is used to insert characters in CHARACTER ENTRY mode (see page  
36).  
2. ONLINE Lamp  
Blinks when communicating between the facsimile unit and a personal com-  
7. DELETE Key  
puter.  
This key is used to delete characters in CHARACTER ENTRY mode (see page  
36).  
3. BUSY Lamp  
Illuminated when communicating using the phone line.  
8. MULTI/CHARGE CODE Key  
Performs Multi-address Transmissions (Broadcast) or a Multi-polling receptions  
(see page 109). This key also used to input the charge code (see page 150).  
4. ALARM Lamp  
Is illuminated when any error occurs (see page 204).  
9. SPEED DIAL/ALPHA Key  
5. LCD Display  
Used for accessing Abbreviated, Alphabet, or Group dialing telephone directories  
(see pages 90 and 91).  
Display machine status and configuration information for operator viewing and  
interaction.  
12  
10.REDIAL/PAUSE Key  
20.SUPER ENERGY SAVER key and SUPER ENERGY SAVER Lamp  
Press this key to select the Super Energy Saver Mode.  
Press this key to redial a facsimile/telephone number if the number was busy on  
your first try (see page 100). Or, use this key to enter a pause between tele-  
phone digits when entering a remote facsimile number.  
Illuminated when the facsimile is in the Super Energy Save Mode.  
21.COPY Key  
11.MONITOR Key  
Press this key, with a document in the Document Support, to copy a document  
Used to enable the speaker monitor, for monitoring call progress during non  
(see page 87).  
memory document feeder transmissions (see page 98).  
22.STOP Key  
12.SHIFT Key  
Used to stop operation or cancel system programming. This key is also used to  
Press this key prior to selecting One Touch keys No.20 to No.38.  
clear an error condition.  
13.JOB STATUS Key  
23.START Key  
Displays the communication status of reserved transmissions (see page 105).  
Press this key to start facsimile communication. This key is also used to com-  
plete programming.  
14.CONTRAST Key and DARKER, LIGHTER Lamps  
Select the desired contrast level of transmit document or copying. When normal  
mode is selected, none of the CONTRAST lamps will be illuminate (see page  
84).  
15.ENTER Key  
Press this key to enter a selected menu item or select a menu entry.  
MENU  
16.Menu Keys (  
,
,
,
Keys)  
These keys are used to scroll through LCD menu prompts (see page 35).  
17.MODE Key and FINE, U-FINE, HALFTONE Lamps  
Select the desired resolution for transmission or copying. When Standard mode  
is selected, none of the MODE lamps will be illuminated (see page 83).  
18.JOB CANCEL Key  
Used to cancel a job reserved or being performed (see page 106).  
19.Dial Keypad  
Use these 12 keys just like a telephone keypad to dial telephone/facsimile num-  
bers (see page 35).  
The dial keys are also used to enter alphanumeric characters for remote parties  
names, etc. (see page 36).  
The  
is also used as the [TONE] Key. The  
key is helpful to access  
various services requiring touch-tone dialing when you are connected to a Rotary  
line (see page 106).  
13  
Function Keys  
Frequently used functions are pre-assigned to five keys  
on the right side of One Touch key panel.  
DIRECT SEND TX REPORT CHAIN DIAL JOURNAL  
AUTO  
DIRECT SEND  
Allows transmission direct from the document feeder without scanning the docu-  
ment to memory first (see page 95).  
TX REPORT  
Press this key to request or disable a Transmission Report for your current  
transmission job.  
CHAIN DIAL  
Used to dial a remote party using Chain Dialing (see page 141).  
JOURNAL  
Used to print communication journals (see page 178).  
AUTO  
Used to select the reception mode, auto receive, Fax/Tad, Tel/Fax or manual.  
14  
SETUP - UNPACKING  
1
2
Unpack the Carton  
Make Sure All Items are Enclosed  
2
1
7
9
8
6
3
12  
14  
15  
10  
5
4
13  
11  
Packing List  
Check the carton and report any damage to the deliv-  
ery service. Save the carton and packing materials for  
future use.  
1. Facsimile .................................................. 1  
2. Document Support .................................... 1  
3. Recording Paper Exit Tray ........................ 1  
4. Document Exit Tray .................................. 1  
5. Recording Paper Tray  
8. AC Power Cord ......................................... 1  
9. Phone Line Cord (Modular Cord) ............... 1  
10. Quick Reference Guide ............................. 1  
11. Warranty Card ........................................... 1  
12. Quick Start Guide ..................................... 1  
13. Overlay ..................................................... 2  
14. User Documentation CD-ROM .................. 1  
15. TOSHIBA Viewer CD-ROM ....................... 1  
Check the items in the carton with the following pack-  
ing list. If anything is missing, contact your dealer im-  
mediately.  
(with Bypass Tray) .................................... 1  
6. Toner Cartridge ......................................... 1  
7. Drum Unit ................................................. 1  
15  
3
Select a Desirable Location  
The unit should be installed:  
•
•
•
On a horizontal surface.  
Away from direct sunlight, dust, extreme heat and humidity, and vibration.  
Away from sources of strong electrical or magnetic fields, such as televisions or  
radios.  
•
Within reach of an electrical outlet. Use an outlet not shared with equipment that  
generates electrical noise or consumes large amounts of electricity, such as an  
air conditioner, or a copier.  
•
•
Within reach of a telephone connection. Use a dedicated, single-line telephone  
connection.  
Allow for adequate ventilation. The rear and sides of the unit need to be clear to  
allow proper air flow to the unit’s power supply.  
WARNING  
• After a suitable place has been selected for the installation of  
the e-STUDIO, please do not change it. Avoid excessive  
heat, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. Also, provide proper  
ventilation as the copier emits a small amount of ozone.  
• The socket outlet should be installed near the equipment and  
be easily accessible. Pull out the plug from the outlet more  
than once a year to clean around the prongs. Accumulating  
dust and dirt could cause a fire due to the heat released by  
electric leakage.  
NOTE:  
Be sure to hold the e-STUDIO170F by 2 place  
with both hands as shown in the illustration on  
the right.  
16  
- FACSIMILE MACHINE INSTALLATION  
Connecting Your TOSHIBA Facsimile  
Make sure that the Power Switch is turned OFF.  
Plug in the power cord as in the figure below.  
Connect the telephone line cord (modular cord) to the “LINE” connector.  
Connect the external telephone set (if desired) to the “TEL” connector.  
Power Switch  
OFF  
Power Cord  
WARNING  
•
•
•
•
•
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.  
Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.  
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.  
Use caution when installing or modifying the telephone lines.  
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electric storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock  
from lightning.  
•
Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
17  
Document Exit Tray  
Recording Paper ExitTray  
Document Support  
Recording Paper Exit  
Tray Installation  
Document Support  
Installation  
Open the Front Cover  
Document Exit Tray  
Installation  
Close the Front Cover  
Fit the tabs of the Recording  
Paper Exit Tray onto the posts  
on the back side of the unit.  
Fit the tabs of the Document  
Support into the slots on the  
top side of the unit.  
Hold the Front Cover by the  
grips on both sides of its upper  
part and pull it down to open it.  
Fit the tabs of the Document  
Exit Tray into the slots on the  
front side of the unit.  
Press up the Front Cover until  
it clicks to attach securely.  
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Recording Paper Exit  
Tray or apply strong force.  
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Document Support or  
apply strong force.  
NOTE:  
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Document Exit Tray  
or apply strong force.  
Do not pull the Front Cover  
too strongly when opening  
it.  
•
Extend the Document Exit  
Tray Extension for long  
documents.  
NOTE:  
It may be necessary to gen-  
tly bow the base of the sup-  
port toward you as you  
place the support into posi-  
tion.  
18  
Bypass Tray  
Recording Paper Tray  
Recording Paper Tray  
Installation  
Bypass Tray Installation  
Place the hooks of the Record-  
ing Paper Tray into the guides  
on the front side of the unit and  
press into position.  
Place the Bypass Tray on the  
Recording Paper Tray.  
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Bypass Tray or apply  
strong force.  
•
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Recording Paper  
Tray or apply strong force.  
19  
- INITIAL PRINTING SUPPLIES INSTALLATION  
Recording Paper Installation (Recording Paper Tray)  
About Recording Paper:  
Remove the Bypass  
Tray  
Open the Paper  
Guides  
Prepare Recording  
Paper Sheets  
1
2
3
•
Use only recommended paper brands to optimize your facsimi-  
le performance. Contact your authorized TOSHIBA dealer for  
more information.  
•
•
Remove the recording paper when storing or relocating your  
facsimile.  
Avoid using damaged, folded or misaligned recording paper.  
Use of damaged paper could cause double feeding or paper  
jamming.  
•
•
Use of damp recording paper will cause poor printing over all or  
part of the image area. If the paper is excessively moist, print  
quality may become uneven and voiding may occur. Replace  
the paper, should this condition exist.  
Remove the Bypass Tray from  
Recording Paper Tray.  
Pull down the front plate of the  
Recording Paper Tray, and  
then fully extend the Paper  
Guide with the hook on the  
right.  
Prepare new recording paper  
sheets by holding both ends  
and flexing several times.  
Do not add paper on top of the paper already in the machine. If  
you wish to add paper, first remove the existing paper. Then  
stack the existing paper with the new paper before inserting  
into the machine.  
This will separate the sheets  
and provide optimum feeding.  
Align the stack so that all four  
corners are neatly aligned.  
Be sure to load the recording  
paper in accordance with any  
paper manufacturer’s printing  
side instruction. Some papers  
have a preferred image side.  
This image side should be  
placed face up in the Record-  
ing Paper Tray.  
20  
Recording Paper Installation (Recording Paper Tray) - continued  
Install the  
Recording Paper  
Adjust the Paper  
Guides  
Replace the Bypass  
Tray  
Display the Paper  
Size Menu  
Select the Paper  
Size  
4
5
6
7
8
Press:  
Select the paper size of the  
Recording Paper Tray.  
MENU  
To select letter size, press:  
To select A4 size, press:  
To select legal size, press:  
+
+
+
+
Place the recording paper  
stack into the tray.  
Adjust the Paper Guides to fit  
the size of the Recording Pa-  
per.  
Replace the Bypass Tray.  
CAUTION:  
NOTES:  
Do not place heavy objects  
on the Document Exit Tray  
or apply strong force.  
Push up the front plate of the  
Recording Paper Tray to close  
it.  
•
Do not exceed the upper  
stack limit line as this may  
cause paper mis-feeds.  
COMPLETED  
The menu below displays:  
PAPER SIZE (TRAY 1)  
1.LT  
•
Do not add paper on top of  
the paper already in the ma-  
chine.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
2.A4  
3.LG  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
NOTE:  
If you install legal size pa-  
per but fail to select “3.LG”  
at this point, the machine  
will think letter size paper is  
installed. False “Paper Jam”  
failures will occur when the  
legal size paper is fed into  
the printer.  
21  
Recording Paper Installation (Recording Paper Tray) - continued  
Return to the  
Standby Mode  
9
STOP  
Press  
to return to the  
Standby Mode.  
22  
Recording Paper Installation (Bypass Tray)  
NOTE:  
The single sheet of paper in the Bypass Tray will be fed in-  
Open the Paper  
Guides  
Insert the Recording  
Paper  
Adjust the Paper  
Guides  
1
2
3
stead of the paper in the Recording Paper Tray. If the machine  
is equipped with the optional Lower Paper Tray, the single  
sheet in the Bypass Tray will feed only when the Upper Paper  
Tray is selected.  
Open the Paper Guides.  
Insert a one sheet of paper on  
the Bypass Tray.  
Adjust the Paper Guides so  
that both sides of the paper are  
secure.  
CAUTION:  
Do not insert more than one  
sheet of paper on the By-  
pass Tray.  
It will cause a paper jam.  
23  
Recording Paper Installation (Optional Recording Paper Tray)  
Remove the Optional  
Recording Paper  
Tray  
Remove the  
Optional Tray Cover  
Press Down the  
Paper Pressure Plate  
Prepare Recording  
Paper Sheets  
Install the Recording  
Paper  
1
2
3
4
5
Remove the Optional Record-  
ing Paper Tray.  
Remove the Optional Tray  
Cover.  
Press the Paper Pressure Plate Prepare new recording paper  
Place the recording paper  
stack into the tray.  
down until it clicks.  
sheets by holding both ends  
and flexing several times.  
NOTES:  
This will separate the sheets  
and provide optimum feeding.  
•
Do not exceed the upper  
stack limit line as this may  
cause paper misfeeds.  
Align the stack so that all four  
corners are neatly aligned.  
•
Make sure that the paper is  
seated under the two sepa-  
ration claws on the back  
side of tray.  
Be sure to load the recording  
paper in accordance with any  
paper manufacturer’s printing  
side instruction. Some papers  
have a preferred image side.  
This image side should be  
placed face up in the Recording  
Paper Tray.  
•
•
Be careful not to damage  
the claws of the Recording  
Paper Tray.  
Do not add paper on top of  
the paper already in the ma-  
chine.  
NOTE:  
There are two types of the  
Optional Recording Paper  
Tray, one for A4-size paper  
and another for letter-size  
paper. Use the Tray meet-  
ing your paper size.  
24  
Recording Paper Installation (Optional Recording Paper Tray) - continued  
Select the Paper Size  
of the Recording  
Paper Tray  
Select the Paper Size  
of the Optional  
Recording Paper Tray  
Replace the Optional  
Tray Cover  
Insert the Optional  
Recording Paper Tray  
Display the Paper  
Size Menu  
6
7
8
9
10  
Select the paper size of the  
Optional Recording Paper Tray.  
Select the paper size of the  
Recording Paper Tray.  
Press:  
MENU  
To select the letter size, press:  
To select the A4 size, press:  
To select letter size, press:  
To select A4 size, press:  
To select legal size, press:  
+
+
+
+
Replace the Optional Paper  
Tray Cover.  
Insert the Optional Recording  
Paper Tray all the way into the  
machine.  
COMPLETED  
NOTE:  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
As the tray is inserted, lis-  
ten for the sound of the pa-  
per pressure plate moving  
up into position.  
PAPER SIZE (TRAY 2)  
1.LT  
The menu below displays:  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
2.A4  
PAPER SIZE (TRAY 1)  
1.LT  
2.A4  
3.LG  
25  
Recording Paper Installation (Optional Recording Paper Tray) - continued  
Return to the  
Standby Mode  
11  
STOP  
Press  
to return to the  
Standby Mode.  
26  
Drum Unit and Toner Cartridge Installation  
IMPORTANT:  
Removetheprotective  
cover from the Toner  
Cartridge  
Attach the Toner  
Cartridge to the  
Drum Unit  
Open the Front  
Cover  
Prepare a Toner  
Cartridge  
1
2
3
4
When you use a toner cartridge  
of our recommendation, the  
facsimile machine can detect  
whether or not the cartridge is  
inserted in the machine and  
alert the user when the amount  
of toner is low or needs replac-  
ing. As the facsimile machine  
does not start printing when the  
toner is not inserted or when  
the amount of toner is insuffi-  
cient, loss of received data can  
be prevented. If a toner car-  
tridge other than that of our rec-  
ommendation is used, the ma-  
chine may not be able to detect  
whether the toner cartridge has  
been inserted or if the toner  
amount is sufficient, and print-  
ing is not possible using the  
default setting.  
Hold the Front Cover by the  
grips on both sides of its upper  
part and pull it down to open it.  
Mix the Toner by shaking the  
Toner Cartridge back and forth.  
NOTE:  
Do not touch the Develop-  
Match the colored parts in the  
lower area of the Drum Unit  
with the same colored parts in  
the lower area of the Toner Car-  
tridge.  
ment Roller of the Toner  
Cartridge. The image quality  
could be degraded.  
NOTE:  
Avoid touching the toner to  
your clothing since toner  
cannot be removed easily.  
If the toner sticks to your  
clothing, immediately rinse  
out the toner with cold wa-  
ter.  
NOTE:  
Do not pull the Front Cover  
too strongly when opening  
it.  
NOTES:  
•
Keep the Toner Cartridge  
level with the Drum Unit  
when they are detached.  
If you want to use a toner car-  
tridge other than that of our rec-  
ommendation, please inform  
our service center. The service  
center will change the machine  
setting to cancel the detection  
function. Please note, however,  
that when the setting is so  
•
Do not touch the PC Drum  
under the lid of the Drum  
Unit. The image quality  
could be degraded.  
•
Do not touch the metal area  
of the Toner Cartridge. It  
could be damaged due to  
electrostatic interference.  
changed, the machine will start  
printing even if a toner cartridge  
is not inserted or the toner  
amount is insufficient. Conse-  
quently, the printout may not  
be satisfactory and the re-  
ceived data may be lost.  
27  
Drum Unit and Toner Cartridge Installation - continued  
Install the Process  
Unit  
Close the Front  
Cover  
5
6
Install the Process Unit along  
the Guide in the machine.  
Make sure the Process Unit is  
inserted inside the machine as  
far as it will go.  
Press up the Front Cover until  
it clicks to attach securely.  
NOTE:  
Pressing in the Process  
Unit forcibly could damage  
the machine.  
CAUTION:  
Hold the Process Unit by  
the green handle.  
28  
- PRINTING SUPPLIES REPLACEMENT  
Toner Cartridge Replacement  
Replacement Toner Kits for your TOSHIBA facsimile include a  
Toner Cartridge.  
Detach the Toner  
Cartridge from the  
Drum Unit  
Open the Front  
Cover  
Remove the Process  
Unit  
1
2
3
Your TOSHIBA facsimile has been designed to display a two  
stage alert to replace Toner once it has been depleted.  
The first stage is a “TONER LOW” warning that alerts you that the  
Toner is low and should be replaced at your earliest convenience.  
The unit will continue to receive and print facsimile messages dur-  
ing this stage.  
The second stage is a “TONER EMPTY” notice. When this mes-  
sage is displayed, the machine can no longer print documents.  
Receptions will be stored in memory until the Toner has been re-  
placed.  
Hold the Front Cover by the  
grips on both sides of its upper  
part and pull it down to open it.  
Lift up and holding the green  
handle, gently pull out the Pro-  
cess Unit.  
Move the lever of the Toner  
Cartridge in the direction of the  
arrow to detach it from the  
Drum Unit.  
It is recommended to replace the Toner Cartridge whenever the  
“TONER LOW” message is displayed using the following proce-  
dure.  
NOTE:  
CAUTION:  
Do not pull the Front Cover  
too strongly when opening  
it.  
Always hold the Process  
Unit by the green handle.  
NOTES:  
• Keep the Toner Cartridge  
level with the Drum Unit  
when they are detached.  
• Do not touch the PC Drum  
under the lid of the Drum  
Unit. The image quality  
could be degraded.  
• Do not touch the metal area  
of the Toner Cartridge. It  
could be damaged due to  
electrostatic interference.  
IMPORTANT:  
When you use a toner cartridge of our recommendation, the fac-  
simile machine can detect whether or not the cartridge is inserted  
in the machine and alert the user when the amount of toner is low  
or needs replacing. As the facsimile machine does not start print-  
ing when the toner is not inserted or when the amount of toner is  
insufficient, loss of received data can be prevented. If a toner car-  
tridge other than that of our recommendation is used, the machine  
may not be able to detect whether the toner cartridge has been  
inserted or if the toner amount is sufficient, and printing is not pos-  
sible using the default setting.  
If you want to use a toner cartridge other than that of our recom-  
mendation, please inform our service center. The service center  
will change the machine setting to cancel the detection function.  
Please note, however, that when the setting is so changed, the  
machine will start printing even if a toner cartridge is not inserted  
or the toner amount is insufficient. Consequently, the printout may  
not be satisfactory and the received data may be lost.  
29  
Toner Cartridge Replacement - continued  
Remove the protec-  
Prepare a New  
Toner Cartridge  
Attach the new  
Toner Cartridge to  
the Drum Unit  
Install the New  
Toner Cartridge and  
Drum Unit  
Close the Front  
Cover  
5
6
4
7
8
tive cover from the  
Toner Cartridge  
NOTE:  
Do not touch the Develop-  
NOTE:  
Match the colored parts in  
Press up the Front Cover until  
it clicks to attach securely.  
Take out the new Toner Car-  
tridge from its shipping carton.  
Mix the Toner by shaking the  
new Toner Cartridge back and  
forth.  
Install the Process Unit along  
the Guide in the machine.  
Make sure the Process Unit is  
inserted inside the machine as  
far as it will go.  
ment Roller of the Toner  
Cartridge. The image quality  
could be degraded.  
the lower area of the Drum  
Unit with the same colored  
parts in the lower area of the  
new Toner Cartridge.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
Pressing in the Process  
Unit forcibly could damage  
the machine.  
Avoid touching the toner to  
your clothing since toner  
cannot be removed easily.  
If the toner sticks to your  
clothing, immediately rinse  
out the toner with cold wa-  
ter.  
CAUTION:  
Always hold the Process  
Unit by the green handle.  
30  
Drum Unit Replacement  
Replacement Drum Kits for  
your TOSHIBA facsimile in-  
clude a Drum Unit.  
STORAGE NOTES:  
Detach the Toner  
Cartridge from the  
Drum Unit  
Open the Front  
Cover  
Remove the Process  
Unit  
1
2
3
The Drum Unit is a very im-  
portant part of this facsimile.  
Handle it with care as shown  
below.  
Your TOSHIBA facsimile has  
been designed to display a two-  
stage alert to replace the Drum  
Unit once it has been depleted.  
Keep the Drum Unit within a  
temperature range of 0-35°C  
(32-95°F) and a humidity  
range of 20-80%RH (without  
condensation).  
The first stage is a “DRUM  
UNIT WARNING” that alerts  
you that the Drum Unit is near  
its end of life and should be re-  
placed at your earliest con-  
vince. The unit will continue to  
receive and print facsimile  
messages during this stage.  
Do not store or use the Drum  
Unit in an environment where  
the temperature changes ex-  
cessively.  
Hold the Front Cover by the  
grips on both sides of its upper  
part and pull it down to open it.  
Lift up and holding the green  
handle, gently pull out the Pro-  
cess Unit.  
Move the lever of the Toner  
Cartridge in the direction of the  
arrow to detach it from the  
Drum Unit.  
Do not touch the light sensi-  
tive drum because its sur-  
face will be easily damaged.  
The second stage is the “RE-  
PLACE DRUM UNIT” notice.  
When this message is dis-  
played, the machine can no  
longer print documents. Recep-  
tions will be stored in memory  
until the Drum Unit has been  
replaced.  
NOTE:  
CAUTION:  
Do not pull the Front Cover  
too strongly when opening  
it.  
Always hold the Process  
Unit by the green handle.  
NOTES:  
Do not place the light sensi-  
tive drum in a location where  
it is exposed to direct sun-  
light or high intensity light  
(more than 200 lx) such as  
near a window.  
•
Keep the Toner Cartridge  
level with the Drum Unit  
when they are detached.  
•
Do not touch the PC Drum  
under the lid of the Drum  
Unit. The image quality  
could be degraded.  
For the purpose of determining  
Drum usage;  
Each legal-size sheet of paper  
counts as 1.3 letter-size sheets  
of paper.  
•
Do not touch the metal area  
of the Toner Cartridge. It  
could be damaged due to  
electrostatic interference.  
31  
Drum Unit Replacement - continued  
Attach the new  
Drum Unit to the  
Toner Cartridge  
Install the Toner  
Cartridge and New  
Drum Unit  
Close the Front  
Cover  
Reset the Drum  
Counter  
Reset the Drum  
Counter - continued  
4
5
6
7
8
Perform the following procedure  
to reset the Drum Unit counter  
after you replace the Drum  
Unit.  
Press:  
Press:  
RESET DRUM COUNT  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
MENU  
+
+
+
+
Press:  
Take the new Drum Unit from  
its shipping carton.  
Install the Process Unit along  
the Guide in the machine.  
Make sure the Process Unit is  
inside the machine as far as it  
will go.  
Press up the Front Cover until  
it clicks to attach securely.  
Match the colored parts in the  
lower area of the new Drum  
Unit with the same colored  
parts in the lower area of the  
Toner Cartridge.  
COMPLETED  
NOTE:  
Pressing in the Process  
Unit forcibly could damage  
the machine.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
CAUTION:  
Return to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
RESET DRUM COUNT  
2.NO  
Always hold the Process  
Unit by the green handle.  
NOTE:  
1.YES  
You must reset the drum  
counter when you replace  
the Drum Unit.  
Never perform this operation  
on any other occasion.  
NOTE:  
Keep in mind that the drum  
warning does not disappear  
unless this operation is per-  
formed.  
32  
Drum Unit Replacement - continued  
Return to the  
Standby Mode  
9
STOP  
Press  
to return to the  
Standby Mode.  
33  
- QUICK START  
This section provides several  
quick start programming steps  
to prepare your new facsimile  
for immediate use.  
Terminal ID  
Receiving  
Receiving a  
Transmitting  
Setting the Terminal ID (Page 42)  
Sending a Facsimile  
(Page 93)  
1
2
3
Facsimile (Page 102)  
These procedures are a simple  
version of the detailed proce-  
dures listed in the manual.  
Next to each procedure head-  
ing is a convenient page num-  
ber reference for the detailed  
procedure. Should you have  
any difficulty with these simple  
procedures, refer to the pages  
listed for more information.  
MENU  
Load your document face down  
into the Document Support.  
Your TOSHIBA facsimile has  
been preset from the factory to  
receive facsimile messages.  
No special setup is required to  
receive facsimile messages.  
FAX NUMBER (20MAX)  
Press:  
,
,
[
]
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Enter your facsimile’s tele-  
phone number, press:  
NAME  
[
(40MAX)  
]
Dial the remote facsimile using  
the Dial Keypad located on the  
Operation Panel. Remember to  
Enter your user ID (company  
name) using the Dial Keypad,  
press:  
It is highly recommended that  
you take the time to read  
through this manual to get the  
most from your new TOSHIBA  
facsimile.  
COMPLETED  
include any access numbers  
REDIAL  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
such as 9 or press the  
af-  
PAUSE  
ter the access number if you  
normally have to wait for a dial  
tone.  
INT. CODE ?  
1.YES  
INITIAL SETUP  
3.TERMINAL ID  
2.NO  
Press:  
STOP  
If you communicate internation-  
ally, select:  
Otherwise, select:  
After the remote facsimile  
number has been entered into  
the keypad, press the green  
START key.  
START  
34  
- USER INTERFACE OPERATION  
Menu Operation  
Various functions of this fac-  
Keys Used in Menu Operation  
simile can be used by selecting  
menu items displayed in the  
LCD window. Performing opera-  
tions or settings by selecting  
menu items is called “Menu  
Operation.” The menus use a  
multi-layered structure.  
MENU  
[
[
[
[
] Key  
Press this key to enter the Menu Operation or to scroll up the menu selections.  
MENU  
] Key  
Starting Menu Operation:  
When the facsimile is in the  
MENU  
Press this key to scroll down the menu selections.  
] Key  
Standby Mode, press  
Press this key to display the preceding menu screen or to move the cursor to the left.  
to start Menu Operation.  
(In the Standby Mode, the dis-  
play shows the date, time and  
residual memory % on the first  
row and the receive mode on  
the second row as shown be-  
low.  
] Key  
Press this key to display the sub-menu screen or to move the cursor to the right.  
START  
[ENTER] Key or [START] Key  
or  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
When the displayed item has sub-items, pressing this key operates the same as the [  
Key.  
]
When the displayed item is the end item, press this key to complete the item selection.  
Completing or Canceling  
Menu Operation:  
When you have reached the  
end of a programming step or  
wish to cancel a programming  
STOP  
Dial Keypad [1] to [0] Keys  
Used to enter desired information or to select options.  
procedure, press  
to re-  
turn to the Standby Mode.  
STOP  
[STOP] Key  
Used to exit the Menu Operation and return to the Standby Mode.  
35  
Character Entry  
When programming and regis-  
tering the Autodialer numbers  
or names, you will need to en-  
ter alphanumeric characters.  
Keys Used in Character Entry  
Entry Procedure  
[INSERT] Key  
INSERT  
This section helps you under-  
stand how to easily enter these  
characters.  
NAME  
[
(20 MAX)  
An example to enter “NEW  
YORK”:  
Inserts characters before the selected  
(underlined) character.  
]
DELETE  
Press  
twice to display “N.” Note that “M” was dis-  
[DELETE] Key  
played on the first press followed by “N” on the second.  
Deletes the selected (underlined) charac-  
ter.  
NOTE: If the next character is located on the same key  
[
[
] Key  
as the preceding character, press the  
key to  
Moves the cursor to the right. If pressed  
without entering a character, it inserts a  
space.  
move the cursor to the next position. Otherwise  
press the next desired key and the cursor will  
automatically move to the right.  
] Key  
NAME  
[N  
(20 MAX)  
Press  
3 times for Y.  
Moves the cursor to the left.  
]
NAME  
[NEW Y  
(20 MAX)  
]
The dial keypad is used to enter alpha-  
numeric characters. Both U.S. and Foreign  
alphanumeric characters may be selected  
with each Numeric Key. The U.S. characters  
are listed for your convenience above each  
key. By pressing the Numeric Key multiple  
times, you can scroll through all characters  
assigned to a particular key (see table  
below).  
Press  
E.  
2 times for  
NAME  
[NE  
(20 MAX)  
]
Press  
3 times for O.  
NAME  
[NEW YO  
(20 MAX)  
]
Press  
1 time for W.  
NAME  
[NEW  
(20 MAX)  
]
Press  
3 times for R.  
NAME  
[NEW YOR  
(20 MAX)  
]
Press  
2 times to  
insert a blank space.  
Press  
2 times for K.  
NAME  
[NEW  
(20 MAX)  
]
NAME  
[NEW YORK  
(20 MAX)  
]
36  
Character Entry - continued  
Character Correction  
Replacing Characters  
Inserting Characters  
NAME  
[NEW YOPK  
(20 MAX)  
]
NAME  
[NEW YRK  
(20 MAX)  
]
Using  
/
, position the cursor under the char-  
Using  
/
, position the cursor under the point  
INSERT  
acter to be corrected.  
of insertion and press  
.
The message “[ I ]” is displayed on the right end of  
the second row.  
Input the correct character (“R” in this example) by  
NAME  
[NEW YORK  
(20 MAX)  
]
NAME  
[NEW YRK  
(20 MAX)  
]I  
pressing  
change.  
3 times. Press  
to save your  
Enter the desired character(s) (“O” in this example).  
The character(s) will be inserted without deleting  
Deleting Characters  
NAME  
[NEW YORK  
(20 MAX)  
]I  
other characters in the line. Press  
your change.  
to save  
NAME  
[NEEW YORK  
(20 MAX)  
]
Using  
/
, position the cursor under the char-  
acter to be deleted.  
Delete the character by pressing DELETE. Press  
save your change.  
to  
NAME  
[NEW YORK  
(20 MAX)  
]
37  
- INITIAL SETUP  
Initial Setting Summary  
This facsimile has several user  
initial settings.  
Enter the  
Configuration Menu  
Select the Desired Initial Setting (1-4)  
1
2
For your convenience, a quick  
reference summary of all user  
MENU  
MENU  
initial settings is shown on the  
right.  
Press  
or  
until the desired Initial Setting is displayed or enter the desired Initial  
Press  
. The initial  
Menu Screen displays.  
Setting 1 through 4 from the list below. The detailed initial setting procedure for each setting is  
shown in parentheses after the initial setting.  
Each of these initial settings is  
discussed in detail throughout  
the remainder of this section.  
MENU  
1.FAX FEATURES  
1. LANGUAGE - (Page 39) - Selects ENGLISH*, FRANCAIS, DEUTSCH, ITALIANO,  
NEDERLANDS, SVENSKA, SUOMI, NORSK, DANSK, ESPANOL or PORTUGUES display and  
printing.  
Use the following procedures  
to access one or more of these  
initial settings.  
Press  
to enter INITIAL  
2. DATE & TIME - (Page 40) - Sets the Month, Day, Year & Time for your machine. You may se-  
lect to use the 24-hour or the 12-hour format for the time.  
SETUP. The Installation sub-  
menu displays.  
3. TERMINAL ID - FCC MANDATORY - (Page 42) - Sets the Terminal ID (Company Name & Fac-  
simile Number) for your machine.  
INITIAL SETUP  
1.LANGUAGE  
4. DIAL TYPE - (Page 44) - Configures your machine for use with PSTN (Public Switched Tele-  
phone Network)* or PABX (Private Automatic Branch Exchange).  
2.DATE & TIME  
3.TERMINAL ID  
4.DIAL TYPE  
NOTE: * indicates the factory default setting.  
38  
Language Selection  
You can select the language  
used on the LCD display and  
all reports printed by your fac-  
simile. English, Francais,  
Deutsch, Italiano, Nederlands,  
Svenska, Suomi, Norsk,  
Dansk, Espanol and Portugues  
are available.  
Display the  
LANGUAGE Menu  
Select the Desired Language  
1
2
Display  
INITIAL SETUP  
Select the desired language.  
+
(for PORTUGUES)  
+
1.LANGUAGE  
(for ENGLISH)  
COMPLETED  
MENU  
To display the SETUP menu,  
+
Using  
press:  
or  
or  
and  
press:  
(for FRANCAIS)  
MENU  
+
+
Returns to display the Standby  
menu screen.  
(for DEUTSCH)  
+
(for ITALIANO)  
+
(for NEDERLANDS)  
LANGUAGE  
01.ENGLISH  
INITIAL SETUP  
1.LANGUAGE  
+
02.FRANCAIS  
03.DEUTSCH  
04.ITALIANO  
05.NEDERLANDS  
06.SVENSKA  
07.SUOMI  
(for SVENSKA)  
+
(for SUOMI)  
08.NORSK  
09.DANSK  
10.ESPANOL  
11.PORTUGUES  
+
(for NORSK)  
+
(for DANSK)  
+
(for ESPANOL)  
39  
Date and Time Setting  
This facsimile displays the cur-  
Display the DATE &  
TIME Menu  
Enter the Date Data  
Select the Date  
Format  
Select the Month  
Format  
rent date and time when in the  
Standby Mode. It also uses  
this time for maintaining inter-  
nal list and reports. Follow this  
procedure to set the time and  
date.  
2
3
1
4
Move the cursor to the desired  
position using the following  
keys.  
Select the date format for dis-  
play and print.  
Select the month format.  
Display  
INITIAL SETUP  
2.DATE & TIME  
(for NUMERIC, such as 01, 02,  
03 ...)  
To display the SETUP menu,  
press:  
(for Month/Day/Year 4-digit)  
(for Day/Month/Year 4-digit)  
(for Year 4-digit/Month/Day)  
or  
MENU  
Using  
press:  
or  
and  
MENU  
Enter the date.  
(for NAME, such as JAN,  
FEB, MAR ...)  
+
or  
INITIAL SETUP  
1.LANGUAGE  
DATE  
[01-15-2005]  
MONTH FORMAT  
2.NAME  
TIME FORMAT  
2.12 HOUR  
When the correct date is en-  
tered, press:  
1.NUMERIC  
1.24 HOUR  
DATE FORMAT  
1.MM-DD-YYYY  
2.DD-MM-YYYY  
3.YYYY-MM-DD  
40  
Date and Time Setting - continued  
Select the Time  
Format  
Enter the Time Data  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
6
7
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or  
press  
Select the time format.  
Move the cursor to the desired  
position using the following  
keys.  
(for 24-hour format)  
or  
STOP  
TIME  
[09:43]  
Enter the time.  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
(for 12-hour format) default  
TIME  
[09:43AM]  
Change the AM/PM designa-  
tion by pressing the following  
keys. (For 12-hour format)  
MENU  
or  
When the correct time is en-  
tered, press:  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
41  
Terminal ID Setting  
This facsimile places your  
company’s name, facsimile  
telephone number and date &  
time on top of all transmitted  
documents. This feature en-  
ables remote parties to easily  
identify your documents and  
time of transmission.  
Display the  
TERMINAL ID Menu  
Enter the User ID  
Select the  
International Code  
Enter Your  
Telephone Number  
1
2
3
4
Enter your user ID (company  
name) using the Dial Keypad.  
You can use up to 40 charac-  
ters.  
For more information on select-  
ing characters, see page 34,  
Character Entry.  
If you send documents over-  
seas, adding your International  
Code to your stored ID name  
will enable the remote party to  
identify the country/region from  
which the document has been  
sent. The 1st digit(s) following  
the “+” sign is for the Interna-  
tional Code.  
If you selected YES in Step 3,  
enter the International Code  
for your country/region before  
entering your area code and  
telephone number.  
Display  
INITIAL SETUP  
3.TERMINAL ID  
MENU  
To display the SETUP menu,  
Example: United States = 1  
Using  
press:  
or  
and  
press:  
Then, enter the telephone  
number that has been con-  
nected to the facsimile.  
MENU  
When your ID name is dis-  
played correctly on the LCD  
display, press:  
+
If you send or receive docu-  
ments to and from overseas,  
press:  
or  
Your facsimile will prompt you  
for your telephone number’s  
international code (country/  
region).  
INITIAL SETUP  
1.LANGUAGE  
If all of your documents are  
sent domestically, press:  
NAME  
[
(40MAX)  
]
INT. CODE ?  
1.YES  
Check the LCD display to  
make sure your telephone  
number appears correctly,  
then press:  
The “+” is displayed when Inter-  
national Code is selected.  
2.NO  
If the terminal ID is already  
set, the current name is dis-  
played on the second row.  
FAX NUMBER (20MAX)  
[+  
]
NAME  
(40MAX)  
[e-STUDIO170F  
]
COMPLETED  
The new name will be dis-  
played on the second row as it  
is entered.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
42  
Terminal ID Setting - continued  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or  
press  
STOP  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
43  
Dial Type Setting  
This facsimile can be con-  
nected not only to the public  
switched telephone network  
(public line) but also to a PABX  
(Private Automatic Branch Ex-  
change). With PABX, the Ac-  
cess Digits setting is required  
to obtain the public line.  
Display the DIAL  
TYPE Menu  
Select Your Dial  
Type  
Enter the Access  
Digits  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
4
Display  
Select your dial line type.  
Enter the digit(s) for obtaining  
the public line using the Dial  
Keypad.  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
INITIAL SETUP  
4.DIAL TYPE  
(for PSTN type)  
default  
MENU  
To display the SETUP menu,  
STOP  
Using  
press:  
or  
and  
press:  
MENU  
(for PABX type)  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
+
After selecting the PABX type,  
the following will be displayed.  
or  
When the correct Access Digit  
is displayed, press:  
ACCESS DIGIT = (1-3)  
[ ]  
Access digits are numbers  
which are required by PABX  
systems to access the phone  
system “outside” the PABX.  
INITIAL SETUP  
1.LANGUAGE  
DIAL TYPE  
1.PSTN  
2.PABX  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
44  
- DEVICE CONFIGURATION  
Configuration Summary  
This facsimile has many user  
adjustable settings.  
Enter the  
Configuration Menu  
Select the Desired Configuration Setting (01-11)  
2
1
Each of these configuration  
settings is discussed in detail  
throughout the remainder of  
this section.  
MENU  
MENU  
Press  
. The initial  
Press  
or  
until the desired Configuration Setting is displayed or enter the desired  
Menu Screen displays.  
Configuration Setting 01 through 11 from the list below. The detailed configuration procedure for each  
setting is shown in parentheses after the configuration setting.  
Use the following procedures to  
access one or more of these  
configuration settings.  
MENU  
1.FAX FEATURES  
01. SPEAKER VOLUME - (Page 46) - Sets the Bell Ringer, Alarm Tone, Key Touch Tone and  
Monitor volume (8-1) (5*) for the machine. Adjust the volume by checking the sound made in  
every setting.  
Press  
to enter DEFAULT  
02. POWER SAVER - (Page 50) - Configures the machine’s Super Energy Saver function for Auto-  
SETTINGS. The Default Set-  
tings sub-menu displays.  
matic/Manual* or Off operation and Printer Power Saver function for On or Off.  
03. DEPARTMENT CODE - (Page 52) - Enables, Disables* and Configures up to 50 Department  
DEFAULTSETTINGS  
1.MACHINESETTINGS  
Codes.  
04. ACCOUNT CODE - (Page 56) - Enables or Disables* a 4-digit Account Code entry.  
Press  
to enter MACHINE  
05. LINE MONITOR - (Page 57) - Enables or Disables* a Line Monitor function.  
SETTINGS. The Machine Set-  
tings sub-menu will now be dis-  
played.  
06. RECEIVE INTERVAL - (Page 58) - Sets an interval for the machine to wait (0 - 14 min.) after  
making four consecutive dialings.  
07. ECM - (Page 59) - Enables or Disables* an ECM function.  
MACHINESETTINGS  
01.SPEAKERVOLUME  
08. SORT COPY - (Page 60) - Enables or Disables* a Sort Copy function.  
02.POWER SAVER  
03.DEPARTMENTCODE  
04.ACCOUNTCODE  
05.LINEMONITOR  
06.RECEIVEINTERVAL  
07.ECM  
09. REDIAL MODE - (Page 61) - Sets the number of redials (0-14) (5*) and redial interval (1min.-  
15min.) (1*min.).  
10. RECEPTION MODE - (Page 62) - Configures FAX*, FAX/TAD, TEL/FAX or Manual reception  
modes.  
08.SORT COPY  
09.REDIAL MODE  
10.RECEPTIONMODE  
11.COPYREDUCTION  
11. COPY REDUCTION - (Page 64) - Configures the machine’s Copy Reduction function for Auto or  
Off* operation.  
NOTE: * indicates the factory default setting.  
NOTE: Only 1 selection can be  
displayed at one time.  
45  
Ringer Volume Adjustment  
The bell ringer volume can be  
adjusted using the following  
procedure.  
Display the RINGER  
VOLUME Menu  
Enter the Desired  
Volume Value  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
Enter the desired volume value  
(1 to 8; 1 for maximum, 7 for  
minimum, 8 for off).  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other volume settings  
referring to their associated  
MENU  
+
pages for instructions, or press  
STOP  
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
or  
Select the desired volume  
value, using the following keys.  
MENU  
or  
When the desired value is dis-  
played, press:  
The current setting is displayed  
on the bottom row.  
RINGER VOLUME  
5.>>>  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
46  
Alarm Tone Volume Adjustment  
The alarm tone volume can be  
adjusted using the following  
procedure.  
Display the ALARM  
VOLUME Menu  
Enter the Desired  
Volume Value  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
Enter the desired volume value  
(1 to 8; 1 for maximum, 7 for  
minimum, 8 for off).  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other volume settings  
referring to their associated  
MENU  
+
pages for instructions, or press  
STOP  
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
or  
Select the desired volume  
value, using the following keys.  
MENU  
or  
When the desired value is dis-  
played, press:  
The current setting is displayed  
on the bottom row.  
ALARM VOLUME  
5.>>>  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
47  
Key Touch Tone Volume Adjustment  
The key touch tone volume can  
Display the KEY  
Enter the Desired  
Volume Value  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
be adjusted using the following  
1
2
3
TOUCH VOLUME  
procedure.  
Menu  
Press:  
Enter the desired volume value  
(1 to 8; 1 for maximum, 7 for  
minimum, 8 for off).  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other volume settings  
referring to their associated  
MENU  
+
+
+
+
+
+
pages for instructions, or press  
STOP  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
or  
Select the desired volume  
value, using the following keys.  
MENU  
or  
When the desired value is dis-  
played, press:  
The current setting is displayed  
on the bottom row.  
KEY TOUCH VOLUME  
5.>>>  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
48  
Monitor Volume Adjustment  
The line monitor volume can be  
adjusted using the following  
procedure.  
Display the MONITOR  
VOLUME Menu  
Enter the Desired  
Volume Value  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
Enter the desired volume value  
(1 to 8; 1 for maximum, 7 for  
minimum, 8 for off).  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other volume settings  
referring to their associated  
MENU  
+
pages for instructions, or press  
STOP  
+
+
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
or  
Select the desired volume  
value, using the following keys.  
MENU  
or  
When the desired value is dis-  
played, press:  
The current setting is displayed  
on the bottom row.  
MONITOR VOLUME  
5.>>>  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
49  
Power Saver Operation  
This function allows you to  
minimize power consumption  
by turning power off to portions  
of the machine (as selected).  
If the Power Saver function is  
ON, a warm up period is  
needed before printing occurs.  
This facsimile has two Power  
Saver modes, Super Energy  
Saver and Printer Power Saver.  
Super Energy Saver turns virtu-  
ally all power off to minimize  
power consumption. Select one  
of three modes, Automatic,  
Manual or OFF.  
-
No recording paper,  
Display the POWER  
SAVER Menu  
Select the Power  
Saver Mode  
Select the Super  
Energy Saver Option  
1
2
3
-
Document Jam, Record-  
ing Paper Jam,  
-
-
Cover Open,  
Press:  
Select the desired Power  
Saver Mode.  
Select the desired Super En-  
ergy Saver Option.  
MENU  
Toner Cartridge not in-  
stalled,  
+
+
-
-
Toner Empty,  
(to select Automatic mode)  
(to select Super Energy  
Saver mode)  
Process unit not in-  
stalled, Process unit life,  
ENTER TIME  
+
+
+
(1-60)  
[ 3]  
SUPER E.S.  
2.MANUAL  
-
-
-
System Error,  
Memory in use,  
Online with PC  
3.OFF  
Go to Step 4.  
Printer Power Saver turns only  
the fuser section off during the  
time period selected.  
1.AUTOMATIC  
(to select Manual mode)  
Go to Step 3.  
+
In manual mode, you can acti-  
vate Super Energy Saver using  
a key on the Operation Panel.  
NOTES:  
•
When the machine is in the  
Super Energy Saver mode,  
it will exit from the Super  
Energy Saver mode when  
any of the following occurs.  
POWER SAVER  
01.SUPER E.S.  
(to select Printer Power  
Saver mode)  
Go to Step 7.  
02.PRINTERP.S.  
PRINTER P.S.  
1.ON  
-
-
-
The machine receives a  
facsimile,  
(to select OFF)  
2.OFF  
External telephone hand-  
set is lifted,  
Go to Step 7.  
Go to Step 5.  
NOTE:  
Document is loaded into  
the document tray,  
If you select OFF, pressing  
SUPER ENERGY SAVER  
the  
does not let you  
SUPER ENERGY SAVER  
-
-
is pressed, or  
enter the Super Energy  
Saver Mode.  
PC has accessed the  
machine.  
•
Switching to the Super En-  
ergy Saver Mode is not  
available in the following  
cases.  
50  
Power Saver Operation - continued  
Enter the Start Time  
Period  
Select the Printer Power Saver Function  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Enter the Start Time  
and End Time  
4
5
7
6
Enter the time period (in min-  
utes) for standby operation  
prior to entering the Super En-  
ergy Saver mode.  
Enable or Disable the Printer  
Power Saver function.  
Move the cursor to the desired  
position, using the following  
keys.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, press  
START/STOPTIME  
[12:00AM-12:00AM]  
STOP  
(to set Printer Power Saver ON)  
(to set Printer Power Saver OFF)  
(Example if the 12-hour format  
option is selected in DATE &  
TIME setting)  
or  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
Enter the time period.  
When “OFF” is selected, the  
“COMPLETED” message is  
displayed as shown at the bot-  
tom in Step 6. Returns to SET-  
UP menu screen.  
If “ON” is selected, the cur-  
rently set time period is dis-  
played below. The time on the  
left is the Printer Power Saver  
start time (or time that the  
printer unit will power down).  
The time on the right is the  
Printer Power Saver end time.  
ENTER TIME  
(1-60)  
[ 3]  
Change the AM/PM designa-  
tion if selected by pressing the  
following keys.  
When the correct time period is  
displayed, press:  
START/STOPTIME  
[00:00-00:00]  
MENU  
or  
(Example if the 24-hour format  
option is selected in DATE &  
TIME setting)  
When the correct time period is  
displayed, press:  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
COMPLETED  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Go to Step 7.  
Returns to display the setup  
menu screen.  
51  
Department Code Setting  
Department Code operation is  
Display the  
DEPARTMENT CODE  
Menu  
Enable/Disable the Department Code  
Enter the Master  
Department Name  
used to monitor the facsimiles  
activity when shared between  
multiple users or workgroups.  
1
2
3
Press:  
Enable or Disable the Depart-  
ment Code function.  
If Department Code has ever  
been set before, the following  
screen is displayed.  
Department Code NBR. 01 is  
fixed as the Master Depart-  
ment Code. Enter the Master  
Department Name. See page  
36 if you need help selecting  
characters.  
This feature is especially useful  
when billing departments based  
on machine usage.  
MENU  
+
When Department Code opera-  
tion is enabled, access to the  
facsimile is restricted to 50  
valid department code pass-  
words.  
SET DEPT. CODE  
1.RECOVERSETTING  
(for YES-Enable)  
(for NO-Disable)  
+
+
+
2.NEW  
When the name is correctly  
displayed on the LCD display,  
press:  
To recover previously set De-  
partment Codes, press:  
Each department code will be  
assigned a 5-digit department  
code password. These pass-  
words must be entered each  
time a user wishes to send a  
facsimile, make copy, print a  
department journal, etc.  
If “YES” is selected, the follow-  
ing Master Code Name Entry  
screen is displayed.  
MASTER CODE  
[
]
Go to Step 5.  
NAME  
[
]
SET DEPT. CODE  
2.NO  
To set a new Department code,  
press:  
There are two types of Depart-  
ment Codes, Master and Indi-  
vidual. The Master Code is  
used as a supervisor level code  
to add, delete and modify Indi-  
vidual Codes.  
1.YES  
Go to Step 3.  
If “NO” is selected, “COM-  
PLETED” will be displayed.  
Go to Step 3.  
COMPLETED  
The Master Code is also used  
to print the Department Code  
List and Master Journals that  
contain all machine activity.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
The Individual Codes are used  
to gain an access to basic ma-  
chine functions and operations.  
These Department Codes can  
be used to print Journals which  
only show the activity under  
that code.  
Returns to the Standby mode.  
52  
Department Code Setting - continued  
Enter the Master  
Department Code  
Password  
Enter the Individual  
Department Code  
Address  
Enter the Individual  
Department Code  
Name  
Enter the Department  
Code Password  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
4
5
6
7
8
Department Codes NBR. 02  
through 50 are used as Indi-  
vidual Department Codes. En-  
ter the Individual Department  
Code name using the Dial key-  
pad. See page 36 if you need  
help selecting characters.  
When the name is correctly  
displayed on the LCD display,  
press:  
Enter a 5-digit Master Depart-  
ment Code Password using the  
Dial Keypad. This password  
will be required to gain supervi-  
sor access to the machine.  
After entering the Master De-  
partment Code password, the  
facsimile will prompt for an In-  
dividual Department Code ad-  
dress.  
Select an Individual Depart-  
ment Code address from 02 to  
50.  
Enter a 5-digit Department  
Code Password using the Dial  
Keypad. This password will be  
required to gain user/depart-  
ment access to the machine.  
If you want to continue entering  
Department Codes, repeat  
Steps 5 through 7.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings refer-  
ring to their associated pages  
for instructions, or press:  
STOP  
Important: Record the pass-  
word in a safe location so that  
if it is lost or forgotten it can be  
retrieved.  
Important: Record this pass-  
word in a safe location so that  
if it is lost or forgotten it can  
be retrieved.  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
After selecting the Individual  
Department Code address,  
press:  
When the password is correctly  
entered, press:  
When the password is cor-  
rectly entered, press:  
DEPT. NUMBER  
NAME  
DEPT. CODE  
COMPLETED  
(1-50)  
[ ]  
[
]
[
]
Displayed for 2 seconds  
DEPT. NUMBER  
(1-50)  
[ ]  
53  
Department Code Maintenance  
Department Code Maintenance  
is used to cancel or change the  
Master or Individual Depart-  
ment Code.  
Display the  
Enter the Master or  
Individual Department  
Code Address  
Enable/Disable the  
Department Code  
Select the Desired  
Option  
1
2
3
4
DEPARTMENT  
CODE Menu  
Press:  
Enable or Disable the Depart-  
ment Code function.  
Select a Master or Individual  
Department Code address from  
1 to 50.  
Select the desired option.  
Press:  
This procedure can only be per-  
formed by a supervisor who  
possesses the Master Depart-  
ment Code Password. Enter  
this password before proceed-  
ing.  
MENU  
+
(for YES-Enable)  
To delete the previously dis-  
played Department Code and  
return to the Department Code  
Address Entry menu in Step 4  
of Department Code Setting.  
(See page 53.)  
+
+
+
(for NO-Disable)  
NOTE: Disabling Department  
Codes will delete all  
information related to  
the Department Codes  
stored.  
After selecting the Individual  
Department Code address,  
press:  
To change the previously dis-  
played Department Code and  
return to Step 5 of Department  
Code Setting. (See page 53.)  
If “NO” is selected, the “COM-  
PLETED” message will be dis-  
played, the facsimile returns to  
the Standby mode.  
SET DEPT. CODE  
1.YES  
2.NO  
DEPT. NUMBER  
3.RETAIN  
2
To retain the previously dis-  
played Department Code with-  
out modification and return to  
the Department Code Address  
Entry menu in Step 4 of De-  
partment Code Setting. (See  
page 53.)  
If “YES” is selected, the follow-  
ing Master Code Menu is dis-  
played.  
1.DELETE  
2.MODIFY  
DEPT. NUMBER  
(1-50)  
[ ]  
54  
Department Code Maintenance - continued  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
If you wish to continue, repeat  
Steps 2 and 3.  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
STOP  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
55  
Account Codes Setting  
This feature provides valuable  
Account Code tracking informa-  
tion for each facsimile trans-  
mission sent from the unit.  
Display the  
ACCOUNT CODE  
Menu  
Select the Function  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
Enable or Disable Account  
Codes.  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
When a facsimile is transmit-  
ted, the account code number  
will be recorded on the Trans-  
mission Journal.  
MENU  
+
Select ON to enable Account  
Code prompting and printing on  
the Transmission Journal.  
STOP  
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
Or, select OFF to disable Ac-  
count Codes from being  
prompted and printed on the  
Transmission Journal.  
ACCOUNT CODE  
2.OFF  
COMPLETED  
1.ON  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
56  
Line Monitor Default Setting  
This function is used to set the  
speaker ON in order to monitor  
every transmission.  
Display the LINE  
MONITOR Menu  
Select the Line  
Monitor Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
This function is mainly used to  
confirm dialing and phone line  
status.  
Press:  
To turn ON the monitor  
speaker, press:  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
MENU  
+
To turn OFF the monitor  
speaker, press:  
STOP  
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
LINE MONITOR  
2.OFF  
COMPLETED  
1.ALWAYS  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
57  
Receive Interval Setting Operation  
This function insures there will  
be a period of time set aside  
Display the  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Enter the Receive  
Interval  
1
3
2
RECEIVE INTERVAL  
for receiving incoming facsimi-  
les during periods of heavy out  
going transmission activity. Af-  
ter every fourth consecutive  
transmission, this machine will  
wait 0 to 14 minutes to allow  
incoming facsimiles to be re-  
ceived (default is 3 minutes).  
Menu  
Press:  
Enter the interval value (0 to  
14) in minutes.  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
MENU  
+
STOP  
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
Then press:  
NOTE:  
When 0 is set, you cannot  
receive documents during  
the consecutive transmis-  
sion.  
INTERVAL TIME  
(0-14)  
COMPLETED  
[ 3]  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
58  
ECM Default Setting  
ECM (Error Correction Mode) is  
an internationally-recognized  
error correction system. It en-  
ables error free communica-  
tions by automatically re-send-  
ing any portion of the document  
affected by phone line noise or  
distortion.  
Display the SET  
ECM Menu  
Select the ECM  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
Select the desired ECM option.  
To turn ECM to ON, press:  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
MENU  
+
NOTES:  
STOP  
To turn ECM to OFF, press:  
•
Default ECM setting is  
+
+
+
ON.  
•
Both the sender and the  
receiver must have the  
ECM feature to perform  
ECM communications.  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
COMPLETED  
•
This setting cannot be  
changed if a document  
is stored in memory. Re-  
sidual memory must be  
100%.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
ECM  
1.ON  
2.OFF  
59  
Sort Copy Setting  
When copying documents, the SORT function may be selected.  
This function will sort multiple page copies into sets of correct-  
order pages.  
Display the SORT  
COPY Menu  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
This setting establishes the default for the Sort Copy function.  
Sort copy may, also, be set manually at the time the copy opera-  
tion is performed.  
Select the desired option.  
Press:  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
MENU  
To set SORT COPY to ON,  
press:  
Output Examples of Printed Copies  
+
With SORT Function ON  
With SORT Function OFF  
STOP  
To set SORT COPY to OFF,  
press:  
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
Page 1  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 1  
COMPLETED  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 2  
Page 3  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 3  
SORT COPY  
2.OFF  
NOTES:  
NOTES:  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
1.ON  
• The pages are automati-  
• Sorting is the responsibil-  
cally sorted.  
ity of the operator.  
• Requires enough memory  
for the entire multi-page  
document. If there is not  
enough memory (memory  
overflow), the copying pro-  
cedure will be canceled.  
• Memory requirements are  
limited to one page at a  
time.  
• Collation is slower than  
non-collation because the  
entire document must be  
scanned into memory first,  
then printing can occur.  
60  
Setting Redial (Interval and Counter)  
If the destination facsimile you  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Display the REDIAL  
MODE Menu  
Enter the Redial  
Interval  
Enter the Redial  
Counter  
called is busy, your facsimile  
will automatically redial the  
number up to the number of at-  
tempts set by this procedure.  
In addition, your e-  
STUDIO170F will try to redial  
every 1 minute by default. If  
desired, you may change these  
redial settings.  
4
1
2
3
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
Press:  
Enter the interval value (1 to  
15) in minutes.  
Enter the redial counter value  
(0 to 14).  
MENU  
+
STOP  
+
+
+
Redial Interval  
The Redial Interval sets the  
length of time between redial  
attempts. The default redial in-  
terval is 1 minute. You may  
change the interval from 1 to  
15 minutes.  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
Then press:  
Then press:  
Redial Counter  
The Redial Counter sets the  
number of redial attempts. The  
default setting is 5. You may  
change the number of redials  
from 0 to 14 attempts.  
The following screen is dis-  
played.  
NOTE:  
INTERVAL (MINUTES)  
(1-15) [ 1]  
When 0 is set, the Auto-  
matic Redialing does not  
function.  
REDIAL COUNT  
The following screen is dis-  
played.  
(0-14)  
[ 5]  
NOTE:  
Redial setting is not pro-  
vided for the FR model,  
thus menu screens on this  
page do not appear on its  
model.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
61  
Reception Mode Default Setting  
The e-STUDIO170F has four  
reception modes and the re-  
ceiving function differs accord-  
ing to the selected mode.  
TEL/FAX:  
Select the Desired Reception Mode  
Display the Reception  
Mode Menu  
This mode is used when the  
line is used for both facsimile  
and telephone functions.  
The facsimile automatically de-  
termines whether an incoming  
call is for facsimile or tele-  
phone. When the call is for  
telephone, the ringer will ring  
according to the value set for  
the call time. When the call is  
for facsimile, the machine will  
automatically start receiving  
the document.  
2
1
Press:  
Select the desired Reception  
Mode.  
• AUTO RECEIVE  
• FAX/TAD  
• TEL/FAX  
MENU  
• MANUAL RECEIVE  
+
(for TEL/FAX RECEIVE)  
(for AUTO RECEIVE)  
AUTO RECEIVE (FAX):  
If you use the unit as a fac-  
simile most of the time, you  
should select this mode. When  
the unit receives a call, the unit  
enters the automatic fax recep-  
tion mode after the selected  
ring delay.  
+
+
+
If AUTO RECEIVE is selected,  
the following will be displayed.  
TEL/FAX RINGS  
(1-15)  
[ 6]  
RINGS TO ANSWER  
MANUAL:  
(1-10)  
[ 2]  
This mode is used when the  
facsimile is connected to a line  
that is primarily used as a  
(voice) telephone line.  
Upon receiving a ring-in signal,  
pick up the handset to talk with  
the remote party before starting  
a facsimile communication.  
Go to Step 5.  
Go to Step 3.  
FAX/TAD  
(for MANUAL RECEIVE)  
This mode is used together  
with a TAD (telephone answer-  
ing device/machine).  
RECEPTION MODE  
1.FAX  
If MANUAL RECEIVE is se-  
lected, the following will be dis-  
played for 2 seconds (continue  
to Step 6).  
(for FAX/TAD RECEIVE)  
2.FAX/TAD  
3.TEL/FAX  
4.MANUAL  
This mode allows you to re-  
ceive voice messages and fac-  
simile receptions even when no  
one is present in the office.  
Switching between the voice  
message recording and fac-  
simile receiving is performed  
automatically.  
FAX/TAD TIMER  
NOTES:  
(0-99)  
[45]  
•
Manual Reception must  
be initiated by an opera-  
tor. No facsimile receiv-  
ing operations will be  
possible if no one is  
present to initiate the re-  
ception.  
COMPLETED  
Go to Step 4.  
•
Only the Reception Mode  
can be changed using  
AUTO  
the  
key; number of  
rings and timer settings  
cannot be changed.  
62  
Reception Mode Default Setting - continued  
Enter the FAX Ring  
Delay  
Enter the FAX  
Monitor Time  
Enter the Pseudo  
Ring Delay  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
3
4
5
6
Enter the desired number of  
rings (1 to 10) before the fac-  
simile will answer the incoming  
call in Auto Receive mode.  
Enter the desired Fax Monitor  
Time (00 to 99 seconds). Dur-  
ing this period, the facsimile  
will monitor for the automatic  
fax CNG signal. If detected,  
the unit will switch to fax re-  
ception when set for FAX/TAD  
mode.  
Enter the desired number of  
pseudo rings (1 to 15) before  
switching to facsimile reception  
in TEL/FAX mode.  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
STOP  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
When the desired ring count is  
displayed on the LCD, press:  
When the desired ring count is  
displayed on the LCD, press:  
When the desired Fax monitor  
time is displayed on the LCD,  
press:  
COMPLETED  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
COMPLETED  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Go to Step 6.  
Go to Step 6.  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
Go to Step 6.  
63  
Copy Reduction Setting  
This function allows automatic  
Display the COPY  
REDUCTION Menu  
Select the Copy  
Reduction  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
reduction of the recording im-  
age when making copies. The  
default setting is OFF.  
1
2
3
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
Press:  
To set Copy Reduction to  
AUTO, press:  
NOTES:  
MENU  
•
If this function is en-  
abled, documents long-  
er than the effective  
printable area (see page  
86) will be reduced by  
95, 90, 86, 83, 80 or  
73% depending on the  
document length.  
+
To set Copy Reduction to OFF,  
press:  
STOP  
+
+
+
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
•
If this function is dis-  
abled, documents more  
than 10 mm longer than  
the effective printable  
area will be split onto  
two pages. No image  
will be discarded.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
COPY REDUCTION  
2.OFF  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
The excess portion of a  
document that is less  
than 10 mm longer than  
the effective printable  
area will be discarded.  
1.AUTO  
Contact your authorized  
TOSHIBA service representa-  
tive for additional information.  
64  
BASIC FUNCTIONS - AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE DIALING  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration  
Once registered, 38 One Touch  
Display the TEL  
LIST ENTRY Menu  
Display the ABB.  
NUMBERSMenu  
Enter an ABB. Dial  
Number  
When a Preset ABB.  
Dial Number is Active  
and 150 Abbreviated Dial Num-  
bers will allow you to send  
documents or make telephone  
calls to 183 frequently called  
numbers without manually dial-  
ing the entire number.  
1
2
3
4
If the selected Abbreviated Dial  
Number has been previously  
registered, the following infor-  
mation will be displayed on the  
LCD display.  
Press:  
To select “ABB. NUMBERS,”  
press:  
Enter an Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber from 1 to 999.  
MENU  
•
Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
This machine can store up  
150 16-digit facsimile num-  
bers and associated 20-  
character location ID  
+
ALREADYASSIGNED  
TEL LIST ENTRY  
1.ABB. NUMBERS  
ABB. NUMBER ENTRY  
(1-999)  
[ ]  
names. This information is  
stored into Abbreviated Dial  
Numbers labeled from 001  
to 999.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
2.ONE TOUCH KEYS  
3.GROUPNUMBERS  
Make sure the 3-digit number  
(001 to 999) appears correctly,  
then press:  
•
•
One Touch Numbers  
See page 71.  
ABB. NUMBER ENTRY  
3.RETAIN  
Alternate Numbers  
1.DELETE  
2.MODIFY  
If one of the primary fac-  
simile numbers is busy, and  
a 2nd facsimile is located at  
that same remote location,  
the 2nd facsimile’s tele-  
phone number can be pro-  
grammed as an Alternate  
Number.  
NOTE:  
Any leading zero (0) can be  
omitted from the Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number.  
If the ABB. Dial Number you  
entered has not been previ-  
ously registered, the screen  
below will be displayed.  
IMPORTANT:  
The total number of avail-  
able locations will vary de-  
pending upon the amount of  
information stored in each  
location. Up to 128 digits  
can be programmed into a  
One Touch or Abbreviated  
number.  
FAX NUMBER (128MAX)  
[
]
Skip to Step 6.  
If the ABB. Dial Number you  
entered has been previously  
registered, continue to the next  
step.  
65  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued  
Change the ABB. Information  
Enter the Telephone  
Number  
5
6
Enter the telephone number  
you want to store (up to 128  
digits).  
You can delete, modify, or re-  
tain Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
registered in this facsimile.  
5a  
5b  
5c  
RetaintheCurrent  
Delete the ABB. Dial  
Information  
Modify the ABB. Dial  
Information  
ABB. Dial Information  
•
DELETE  
To delete the contents stored  
in the Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber, press:  
To change the number or Lo-  
cation ID (remote facsimile  
name) currently assigned to an  
existing Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber, press:  
If you do not wish to change  
the Abbreviated Dial Number  
information, press:  
Deletes the information  
stored in the selected Ab-  
breviated Dial Number. It  
will also remove the number  
from all associated Group  
Dialing Directories.  
(to DELETE)  
(to RETAIN)  
•
MODIFY  
(to MODIFY)  
Return to Step 3 to select a dif-  
ferent Abbreviated Dial Number  
STOP  
Allows you to change the  
remote facsimile number  
and/or associated Location  
ID name. This selection is  
recommended if the location  
is used in Group Dialing Di-  
rectories.  
ABB. NUMBER  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
001  
The facsimile number currently  
assigned is displayed on the  
bottom row.  
or press  
to return to the  
Standby Mode.  
Then press:  
Skip to Step 6.  
FAX NUMBER (128MAX)  
[XXXXX  
•
RETAIN  
]
Return to Step 3.  
Retains the selected Abbre-  
viated Dial Number informa-  
tion without modification.  
66  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued  
Enter the Telephone  
Number - continued  
Enter an Alternate  
Number(Optional)  
Enter the Location  
ID Name  
Select Communication Options  
(Advanced Setup)  
6
7
8
9
The telephone number is dis-  
played on the bottom row of the  
LCD display as you enter it.  
Confirm that the number is cor-  
rect.  
Alternate Numbers are optional.  
If the remote location does not  
have two or more facsimile  
units in the same area, you can  
leave this entry blank. (See  
page 65 for more information.)  
Enter the Location ID name of  
the remote party to be as-  
signed to the current Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number.  
This setting will allow you to  
specify one or more of the fol-  
lowing Communication Options  
for the Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber you are registering.  
9a  
Select the  
Communication Option  
To skip the Communication  
Options, press:  
See page 36 for more informa-  
tion on Character Entry.  
Delayed Communication  
Default=off  
FAX NUMBER (MAX128)  
Enter the Alternate Facsimile  
Number.  
When the name is displayed  
correctly on the LCD display,  
press:  
[9583359  
]
Select to program a trans-  
mission start time.  
Go to next step.  
Transmission Report  
Default=off  
To select Communication Op-  
tions, press:  
Then press:  
Enables or disables the  
printing of a TX Report.  
ALT NUMBER (128 MAX)  
FAX OPTIONS  
2.NO  
Line Monitor  
[
]
When “1.YES” is selected, the  
FAX OPTIONS screen ap-  
pears. Follow the next steps for  
each item selection.  
Default=off  
1.YES  
Enables or disables the line  
monitor speaker during dial-  
ing.  
Then press:  
NOTE:  
Fax Speed  
FAX OPTIONS  
1.DONE  
To skip the Location ID  
Default=off  
Selects a lower modem  
speed for poor communica-  
tion links.  
Name, press the  
or  
2.DELAYEDCOMM.  
3.TX REPORT  
4.LINE MONITOR  
5.FAX SPEED  
NAME  
[
(20 MAX)  
]
STOP  
to go to the next  
Sub Address  
step.  
Default=none  
NOTE:  
6.SUBADDRESS  
Specifies a Sub Address for  
the Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber being registered. The  
remote unit must support  
Sub-Address capabilities.  
In case of Polling Recep-  
tion, Relay Transmission  
and Mailbox Transmission,  
the documents are not auto-  
matically transferred to the  
Alternate Numbers.  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
67  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options (Advanced Setup) - continued  
9
9c  
9d  
9e  
Line Monitor Speaker  
DelayedCommunications  
TransmissionReport  
9b  
Done with Option  
Setup  
If you have completed the de-  
sired Communication Options  
setting for this Abbreviated Dial  
Number, select DONE by  
pressing:  
To designate a specific time at  
which operations using this  
Abbreviated Dial Number will  
be dialed, press:  
Enter the desired transmission  
start time in either the 12-hour  
or 24-hour format depending on  
the machine setup. (example:  
11:30PM in the 12-hour for-  
mat).  
To request a Transmission Re-  
port automatically after sending  
documents using this Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number, select:  
To enable/disable the  
facsimile’s Line Monitor  
Speaker when dialing this Ab-  
breviated Dial Number, press:  
TX REPORT  
2.OFF  
LINE MONITOR  
2.OFF  
PRESS ONE TOUCH  
OR ENTER  
DELAYED COMM.  
[HH:MMAM]  
DELAYED COMM.  
[11:30PM]  
↑↓  
1.ON  
1.ON  
(12 hour format)  
Skip to Step 10.  
For the 12 hour format, select  
To enable a TX Report, press:  
To enable the monitor speaker,  
press:  
MENU  
DELAYED COMM.  
[HH:MM]  
AM/PM using the  
or  
To disable a TX Report, press:  
.
(24 hour format)  
To disable the monitor speaker,  
press:  
Then press:  
COMPLETED  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the  
next Option.  
COMPLETED  
After 2 seconds:  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the  
next Option.  
After 2 seconds:  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the  
next Option.  
68  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options - continued  
9
9f  
9g  
Sub-AddressCommunication  
FaxSpeed  
To transmit documents using  
this Abbreviated Dial Number  
at a lower speed to compen-  
sate for poor line conditions,  
press:  
Sub-Address Communications  
allow a variety of specialized  
facsimile communications.  
9g-1  
9g-2  
FAX SPEED  
1.FASTESTPOSSIBLE  
Select the Sub-  
Address Options  
Complete the  
Sub-Address  
Options Setup  
2.14400BPS  
3.9600BPS  
4.4800BPS  
SUB  
Sub-Address Transmission  
Allows documents to be routed  
through remote LAN-Facsimile  
devices to specific users’ work-  
stations.  
If the remote party assigned to  
the Abbreviated Dial Number  
requires or provides a Sub Ad-  
dress to route or retrieve mes-  
sages, press:  
To complete Sub Address en-  
try or skip this option, press:  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
To select the FASTEST POS-  
SIBLE, press:  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9.  
Allows documents to be trans-  
mitted to specific Mailboxes in  
remote facsimiles.  
To select 14400BPS, press:  
To select 9600BPS, press:  
To select 4800BPS, press:  
COMPLETED  
SUBADDRESS  
1.DONE  
SEP  
Selective Polling  
Allows documents to be re-  
trieved from specific Mailboxes  
in remote facsimiles.  
After 2 seconds:  
2.SUBADDRESSSUB  
3.SUBADDRESSSEP  
4.SUBADDRESSPWD  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the  
next Option.  
PWD  
Password  
Allows secure communications  
to SUB and from SEP compat-  
ible devices.  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
IMPORTANT:  
NOTE:  
If you designate an incorrect  
sub-address, the communica-  
tion will result in an error. If you  
designate an unnecessary sub-  
address, the communication  
will result in error.  
Only 13 types, "0-9", "*",  
"#" and "-" are available in  
the Sub-Address. However,  
"-" cannot be used at the  
start.  
69  
Abbreviated Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options - continued  
Assign the Abbreviated Dial Number to a One  
Touch Key  
9
10  
9g  
10a  
Sub-AddressCommunication-continued  
Assignthe  
One Touch Key  
10b  
UseaPreassigned  
One Touch Key  
To assign this Abbreviated Dial  
Number to a One Touch Key,  
press the desired One Touch  
Key (Example: One Touch Key  
01).  
If the desired One Touch Key  
has been previously linked to  
another Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber or preset with a separate  
One Touch number, one of the  
following screens will be dis-  
played.  
9g-3  
9g-4  
9g-5  
Select a SUB  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
Select a SEP  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
Select a PWD  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
To enter a SUB type Sub Ad-  
dress, press:  
To enter a SEP type Sub Ad-  
dress, press:  
To enter a PWD type Sub Ad-  
dress, press:  
ALREADYASSIGNED  
COMPLETED  
After 2 seconds:  
SUB  
[
(20MAX)  
]
SEP  
[
(20MAX)  
]
PWD  
[
(20MAX)  
]
After 2 seconds:  
ONE TOUCH NBR  
1.DELETE  
Returns to Step 2.  
2.RETAIN  
STOP  
Enter the required number  
(max. 20 digits), then press:  
Enter the required number  
(max. 20 digits), then press:  
Enter the required number  
(max. 20 digits), then press:  
To DELETE the existing link or  
One Touch assignment and re-  
turn to Step 10a, press:  
Press  
to exit the Menu  
Operation mode and return to  
the Standby Mode.  
To RETAIN the existing link or  
One Touch assignment and re-  
turn to Step 10a, press:  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
NOTE:  
If you do not wish to assign  
it to a One Touch Key,  
STOP  
press the  
button.  
or  
PRESS ONE TOUCH  
OR ENTER  
70  
One Touch Dialer Registration  
This facsimile provides a total  
of 38 One Touch Dial keys.  
Display the TEL  
LIST ENTRY Menu  
Display the ONE  
TOUCH KEYS Menu  
Select a One Touch  
Location  
When a Preset One  
Touch is Active  
1
2
3
4
•
Alternate Numbers  
If one of the primary fac-  
simile numbers is busy,  
and a 2nd facsimile is lo-  
cated at that same remote  
location, the 2nd facsimile’s  
telephone number can be  
programmed as an Alter-  
nate Number.  
Press:  
To select “ONE TOUCH  
KEYS”, press:  
Press the desired One Touch  
key.  
If the pressed One Touch key  
has already been registered  
with a telephone number, the  
following information appears  
on the LCD display.  
MENU  
Example: One Touch key 03  
+
ALREADYASSIGNED  
If the One Touch key has not  
been previously used and the  
following menu is displayed,  
skip to Step 6.  
NOTE:  
TEL LIST ENTRY  
1.ABB. NUMBERS  
PRESS ONE TOUCH  
In case of Polling Recep-  
tion, Relay Transmission  
and Mailbox Transmission,  
the documents are not au-  
tomatically transferred to  
the Alternate Numbers.  
After 2 seconds:  
2.ONE TOUCH KEYS  
3.GROUPNUMBERS  
ONE TOUCH NBR  
3.RETAIN  
FAX NUMBER (128MAX)  
[
]
1.DELETE  
2.MODIFY  
NOTE:  
When an Abbreviated Num-  
ber or a Group Number is  
assigned to the One Touch  
key, the “MODIFY” option  
does not appear on the LCD  
display.  
71  
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued  
Change One Touch Information  
Enter the Telephone  
Number  
5
6
Enter the telephone number  
you want to store (up to 128  
digits).  
You can delete, modify or re-  
tain the One Touch key once  
registered in the facsimile.  
5a  
5b  
5c  
Delete the One Touch  
Assignment  
Modify the One Touch  
Assignment  
Retain the One Touch  
Assignment  
•
DELETE  
To delete the One Touch key  
assignment, press:  
To change the number or Loca-  
tion ID (remote facsimile name)  
currently assigned to an exist-  
ing One Touch key press:  
To retain the previous One  
Touch key assignment, press:  
Deletes the information  
stored in the selected One  
Touch key. It will also re-  
move the number from all  
associated Group Dialing  
Directories.  
(to DELETE)  
(to RETAIN)  
Return to Step 3 to select a dif-  
ferent One Touch key or press  
(to MODIFY)  
•
MODIFY  
ONE TOUCH NBR  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
03  
Allows you to change the  
remote facsimile number  
and/or associated Location  
ID name. This selection is  
recommended if the location  
is used in Group Dialing Di-  
rectories.  
STOP  
The facsimile number currently  
assigned is displayed on the  
bottom row.  
to return to the  
Then press:  
Standby Mode.  
Return to Step 6.  
FAX NUMBER (128MAX)  
[XXXXX  
Return to Step 3.  
]
•
RETAIN  
Retains the selected One  
Touch key information with-  
out modification.  
72  
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued  
Enter the Telephone  
Number - continued  
Enter an Alternate  
Number(Optional)  
Enter the Location  
ID Name  
Select Communication Options  
(Advanced Setup)  
6
7
8
9
The telephone number is dis-  
played on the bottom row of the  
LCD display as you enter it.  
Confirm that the number is cor-  
rect.  
Alternate Numbers are optional.  
If the remote location does not  
have two or more facsimile  
units in the same area, you can  
leave this entry blank. (See  
page 71 for more information.)  
Enter the Location ID name of  
the remote party to be as-  
signed to the current One  
Touch Dial Number.  
This setting will allow you to  
specify one or more of the fol-  
lowing Communication Options  
for the One Touch Number you  
are registering.  
9a  
Select the  
Communication Option  
To skip the Communication  
Options, press:  
See page 36 for more informa-  
tion on Character Entry.  
Delayed Communication  
Default=off  
FAX NUMBER (MAX128)  
Enter the Alternate Facsimile  
Number.  
When the name is displayed  
correctly on the LCD display,  
press:  
[9583359  
]
Select to program a trans-  
mission start time.  
Go to Step 10.  
Transmission Report  
Default=off  
To select Communication Op-  
tions, press:  
Then press:  
Enables or disables the  
printing of a TX Report.  
ALT NUMBER (128 MAX)  
Line Monitor  
[
]
FAX OPTIONS  
2.NO  
When “1.YES” is selected, the  
FAX OPTIONS screen ap-  
pears. Follow the next steps for  
each item selection.  
Default=off  
Enables or disables the line  
monitor speaker during dial-  
ing.  
1.YES  
Then press:  
Fax Speed  
FAX OPTIONS  
1.DONE  
NOTE:  
Default=off  
To skip the Location ID  
Selects a lower modem  
speed for poor communica-  
tion links.  
2.DELAYEDCOMM.  
3.TX REPORT  
4.LINE MONITOR  
5.FAX SPEED  
Name, press the  
or  
NAME  
[
(20 MAX)  
]
STOP  
Sub Address  
to go to the next  
Default=none  
6.SUBADDRESS  
step.  
Specifies a Sub Address for  
the One Touch Dial Number  
being registered. The re-  
mote unit must support  
Sub-Address capabilities.  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
73  
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options (Advanced Setup) - continued  
9
9c  
9d  
9e  
Line Monitor Speaker  
DelayedCommunications  
TransmissionReport  
9b  
Done with Option  
Setup  
If you have completed the de-  
sired Communication Options  
setting for this One Touch Dial  
Number, select DONE by  
pressing:  
To designate a specific time at  
which operations using this  
One Touch Dial Number will be  
dialed, press:  
Enter the desired transmission  
start time in either the 12-hour  
or 24-hour format depending on  
the machine setup. (example:  
11:30PM in the 12-hour for-  
mat).  
To request a Transmission Re-  
port automatically after sending  
documents using this One  
To enable/disable the facsimi-  
le’s Line Monitor Speaker when  
dialing this One Touch Dial  
Number, press:  
Touch Dial Number, select:  
DELAYED COMM.  
[HH:MMAM]  
TX REPORT  
2.OFF  
LINE MONITOR  
2.OFF  
DELAYED COMM.  
[11:30PM]  
PRESS ONE TOUCH  
OR ENTER  
↑↓  
1.ON  
1.ON  
(12-hour format)  
Skip to Step 10.  
For the 12 hour format, select  
To enable a TX Report, press:  
To enable the monitor speaker,  
press:  
DELAYED COMM.  
[HH:MM]  
MENU  
AM/PM using the  
.
or  
(24-hour format)  
To disable a TX Report, press:  
To disable the monitor speaker,  
press:  
Then press:  
COMPLETED  
After 2 seconds:  
COMPLETED  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the  
next Option.  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the  
next Option.  
After 2 seconds:  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the  
next Option.  
74  
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options - continued  
9
9f  
9g  
Sub-AddressCommunication  
FaxSpeed  
To transmit documents using  
this One Touch Dial Number at  
a lower speed to compensate  
for poor line conditions, press:  
Sub-Address Communications  
allow a variety of specialized  
facsimile communications.  
9g-1  
9g-2  
FAX SPEED  
1.FASTESTPOSSIBLE  
Select the Sub  
Address Options  
Complete the  
Sub-Address  
Options Setup  
2.14400BPS  
3.9600BPS  
4.4800BPS  
SUB  
Sub-Address Transmission  
Allows documents to be routed  
through remote LAN-Facsimile  
devices to specific users’ work-  
stations.  
If the remote party assigned to  
the One Touch Dial Number  
requires or provides a Sub Ad-  
dress to route or retrieve mes-  
sages, press:  
To complete Sub Address en-  
try or skip this option, press:  
To select the FASTEST POS-  
SIBLE, press:  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9.  
Allows documents to be trans-  
mitted to specific Mailboxes in  
remote facsimiles.  
To select 14400BPS, press:  
To select 9600BPS, press:  
To select 4800BPS, press:  
COMPLETED  
SUBADDRESS  
1.DONE  
SEP  
Selective Polling  
Allows documents to be re-  
trieved from specific Mailboxes  
in remote facsimiles.  
After 2 seconds:  
2.SUBADDRESSSUB  
3.SUBADDRESSSEP  
4.SUBADDRESSPWD  
The display returns to the first  
screen in Step 9. Select the  
next Option.  
PWD  
Password  
Allows secure communications  
to SUB and from SEP compat-  
ible devices.  
These items are outside  
the LCD frame. To view  
them, use the  
scroll key.  
IMPORTANT:  
If you designate an incorrect  
sub-address, the communica-  
tion will result in an error. If you  
designate an unnecessary sub-  
address, the communication  
will result in error.  
75  
One Touch Dialer Registration - continued  
Select Communication Options - continued  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
9
10  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings refer-  
ring to their associated pages  
for instructions, or press  
9g  
Sub-AddressCommunication-continued  
9g-3  
9g-4  
9g-5  
Select a SUB  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
Select a SEP  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
Select a PWD  
Sub-Address  
Communication  
STOP  
To enter a SUB type Sub Ad-  
dress, press:  
To enter a SEP type Sub Ad-  
dress, press:  
To enter a PWD type Sub Ad-  
dress, press:  
to exit the Configuration Setting  
mode and return to the Standby  
Mode.  
SUB  
[
(20MAX)  
]
SEP  
[
(20MAX)  
]
PWD  
[
(20MAX)  
]
Enter the required number  
(max. 20 digits), then press:  
Enter the required number  
(max. 20 digits), then press:  
Enter the required number  
(max. 20 digits), then press:  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
Returns to Step 9g-1.  
76  
Group Number Registration  
You can send a document to  
Display the TEL  
LIST ENTRY Menu  
Display the GROUP  
NUMBERSMenu  
Enter a Group Number  
multiple remote parties in a  
single operation. This is re-  
ferred to as Group Dialing or  
Multi-address Transmission.  
1
2
3
Press:  
To select “GROUP NUM-  
BERS,” press:  
Enter a Group Number (1 to  
1999).  
If the number entered is al-  
ready registered as a Group  
Number, you will receive an  
LCD prompt like the one below.  
MENU  
It is useful to preset ad-  
dresses, to which Multi-ad-  
dress Transmissions are often  
performed, in a group. To make  
a Multi-address Transmission  
easier, you can assign such a  
group to a One Touch key.  
+
ALREADYASSIGNED  
TEL LIST ENTRY  
1.ABB. NUMBERS  
GROUP NUMBER  
(1-1999)  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
[ ]  
The preset groups can also be  
used as groups for Multi-polling  
Receptions.  
2.ONE TOUCH KEYS  
3.GROUPNUMBERS  
Example: 1  
GROUP NUMBER  
3.RETAIN  
You can register up to 50  
Broadcast Groups using any  
combination of Group Numbers  
from 1 to 1999 (no duplications  
allowed). You may also assign  
each group an optional name  
of up to 20 characters.  
Each group can contain any  
combination of the 150 Abbre-  
viated and/or 38 One Touch  
dial locations and can be as-  
signed to a One Touch key.  
GROUP NUMBER  
(1-1999)  
1.DELETE  
2.MODIFY  
[ 1]  
Then press:  
To select “1.DELETE,” go to  
Step 4a.  
To select “2.MODIFY,” go to  
Step 4b.  
NAME  
[
(20 MAX)  
]
To select “3.RETAIN,” go to  
Step 4c.  
The display changes to the fol-  
lowing for character entry (go to  
Step 5).  
77  
Group Number Registration - continued  
4a Cancel the Existing 4b Modify the Existing 4c Retain the Existing  
5
6
Enter the Group  
Name  
Enter a Remote  
Station  
Group  
Group  
Group  
To delete the existing Group,  
press:  
To change the existing Group,  
press:  
To retain the existing Group,  
press:  
Enter the Group Name (with up  
to 20 characters) associated  
with the Group Number.  
Enter the addresses of the re-  
mote stations to be preset in  
the group.  
If a remote station is assigned  
to a One Touch key, press the  
One Touch key.  
See page 36 for more informa-  
tion on Character Entry.  
(to DELETE)  
(to MODIFY)  
(to RETAIN)  
Return to Step 3 to select a  
different Group Dial Number or  
STOP  
(When no name is entered in  
this step, no name will be given  
to the Group Number.)  
If a remote station is assigned  
to an Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber, enter the number then  
GROUP NUMBER  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
0001  
NAME  
[COLORADO GRP]  
press  
to return to the  
When the name is displayed  
correctly on the LCD display,  
press:  
press  
.
Standby Mode.  
Then press:  
The current Group Name is dis-  
played.  
Example:  
Abbreviated Dial Number  
118 (preset as DENVER  
OFFICE):  
Go to Step 5.  
Return to Step 3.  
ENTER ABB. NUMBER  
OR ONE TOUCH  
+
+
+
GROUP NUMBER  
ABB. NUMBER  
0001  
118  
After 2 seconds:  
PRESS OT OR ABB.  
OR ENTER  
78  
Group Number Registration - continued  
7a Cancel the Group 7b Retain the Group  
8
9
Enter a Remote  
Station - continued  
Complete Group  
StationEntries  
Assign a One Touch  
Key  
6
NumberSetting  
NumberSetting  
Repeat this step until all of the  
required remote station ad-  
dresses are entered. Then go  
to Step 8.  
To delete the existing remote  
station from this group, press:  
To retain this remote station in  
this group, press:  
When all the stations neces-  
sary for this group are entered  
in Step 6, press:  
To assign this group to a One  
Touch key, press the desired  
One Touch key.  
Example: One Touch key 20.  
(to DELETE)  
(to RETAIN)  
NOTES:  
•
When the entered Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number or One  
Touch key has not been  
preregistered with a fac-  
simile number, the display  
shows the message “NUM-  
BER NOT LISTED.” Then  
returns to Step 5.  
+
ABB. NUMBER  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
118  
PRESS OT OR ABB.  
OR ENTER  
PRESS ONE TOUCH  
OR ENTER  
Press:  
Return to Step 6.  
COMPLETED  
After 2 seconds:  
•
When the entered Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number or One  
Touch key is already as-  
signed in this group, the  
display shows the screens  
below.  
DELETED  
GROUP NUMBER  
(1-1999)  
[
]
Returns to Step 3.  
Return to Step 6.  
ALREADYASSIGNED  
After 2 seconds:  
ALREADYASSIGNED  
2.RETAIN  
1.DELETE  
Go to Step 7a or Step 7b.  
79  
Group Number Registration - continued  
Assign a One Touch Key - continued  
9
To skip assigning this group to  
a One Touch key, press:  
If the selected One Touch key  
is already linked to or regis-  
tered with data, the following is  
displayed.  
COMPLETED  
ALREADYASSIGNED  
Return to Step 3.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
STOP  
Press  
to complete the  
Group Setting operation and  
return to the Standby Mode.  
ONE TOUCH NBR  
2.RETAIN  
1.DELETE  
To select “1.DELETE” (to de-  
lete the existing link or preset  
data of this One Touch key),  
press:  
Returns to Step 9.  
To RETAIN, press:  
Returns to Step 9.  
80  
- TRANSMIT CONFIGURATION  
Document Specifications  
Caution:  
If the documents are any of the following, they should be copied to plain paper  
before transmitting.  
The following table shows the specifications for original documents that can be  
used with this facsimile.  
Single Sheet  
Multiple Sheets  
•
•
•
•
Torn, wrinkled, or damp pages  
Folded pages or pages with holes  
Transparent pages or pages with a smooth, shiny finish  
Cloth or metal sheets  
216 mm (W) x 1000 mm (L)  
[8.5 in. (W) x 39.37 in. (L)]  
Max.  
Min.  
Document  
Size  
When using originals with the following specifications, use a carrier sheet to  
avoid document jams or misfeeds. When using carrier sheets, only one sheet  
can be sent at a time.  
148 mm (W) x 100 mm (L)  
[5.83 in. (W) x 3.94 in. (L)]  
Effective Scanning  
Width  
214 mm  
[8.43 in.]  
•
•
Smaller than minimum size.  
With thickness less than 0.05 mm.  
To use a carrier sheet, lift the clear cover, place a single document sheet face-  
up on the paper sheet. Purchase carrier sheets from your TOSHIBA facsimile  
dealer or use a transparency with a paper backing attached at the lead edge.  
Max. Capacity of  
Document Tray  
Up to 15 sheets (Legal Size)  
Up to 40 sheets (A4/Letter Size)  
Thickness of  
Document  
0.06 to 0.15 mm  
[0.003 to 0.006 in.]  
0.065 to 0.1 mm  
[0.003 to 0.004 in.]  
Type of Paper  
Uncoated on both sides  
NOTES:  
•
Operator assistance may be required for pages longer than 356 mm (14.02  
inches).  
•
•
For multiple sheets, the documents must be the same size and paper type.  
A small border region of each document is not imaged when each document  
is scanned. The effective scanning area is as shown in the figure below.  
(
)
216mm 8.5 inches  
(
)
2.5mm 0.1 inches  
Effective  
Scanning  
Area  
A4/Letter/Legal Size  
(
)
2.5mm 0.1 inches  
(
)
214mm 8.43 inches  
81  
Document Loading  
Remove Attached  
Items  
Place Document Pages on the Document  
Support  
Adjust the Settings  
1
2
3
After the facsimile pulls the  
document into the scan posi-  
tion slightly and stops, you  
may change the resolution and  
contrast settings. (It may also  
be changed before or during  
the document loading.)  
To cancel a document already  
set and pulled in, press:  
Up to 30 sheets (Letter-size)  
can be loaded and sent at a  
time.  
Adjust the Document Guides to  
fit the width of the document.  
STOP  
Load the document face down  
on the Document Support. The  
first page of your document  
should be at the bottom of the  
Document Support.  
Stagger the leading edges of  
the sheets slightly and insert  
them into the document feeder.  
If your document is extremely  
dark or light, or if it contains  
photographs, you may wish to  
adjust the contrast and resolu-  
tion settings. See the following  
pages.  
Gently insert the leading edge  
of the paper into the facsimile  
as shown. The facsimile waits  
2 seconds, then pulls the docu-  
ment into the scanning area  
and stops.  
Remove any staples, paper  
clips, or other items from your  
document before feeding it into  
the facsimile.  
When scanning Legal-size doc-  
uments, extend the Document  
Support Extension and Docu-  
ment Exit Tray Extension.  
When a Carrier Sheet is used,  
documents must be sent one  
page at a time (manually fed).  
When the document sheet is  
longer the Document Support,  
assist it with your hand to in-  
sure proper feeding.  
82  
Scan Resolution Setting  
The scan resolution can be set  
FINE  
U-FINE  
to one of the following five  
HALFTONE  
Press  
until the required resolution mode is indicated  
modes based on the type of  
MODE  
image you are scanning.  
MODE  
by the appropriate LED.  
The scan resolution is normally  
set to the default setting.  
: illuminated  
: extinguished  
When you change the resolu-  
tion, the facsimile will return to  
the default setting after each  
transaction. To change the de-  
fault resolution setting, see  
page 85.  
The mode changes as follows:  
(
)
(
)
Standard Mode when all the lamps are extinguished  
Fine Mode  
STANDARD  
For sending normal text and  
graphics.  
Ultra-Fine Mode  
FINE  
Each corresponding  
lamp is illuminated.  
For sending normal text and  
graphics with extra clarity.  
Fine Halftone Mode  
U-FINE (Ultra-Fine)  
For sending fine text and  
graphics with extra clarity.  
FINE HALFTONE  
For detailed photos or docu-  
ments with colors or shad-  
ing.  
Ultra-Fine Halftone Mode  
*
When Ultra-Fine is selected, the e-STUDIO170F will scan all  
U-FINE HALFTONE  
(Ultra-Fine Halftone)  
For very detailed photos or  
documents with colors or  
shading.  
documents at 406 dots/inch horizontal x 391 lines/inch vertical.  
Depending on the capabilities of the remote facsimile receiving  
this document, the document may be transmitted by the e-  
STUDIO170F at Ultra-Fine resolution (406 dots/inch horizontal  
x 391 lines/inch vertical) or it may be transmitted at Super Fine  
(203 dots/inch horizontal x 391 lines/inch vertical).  
83  
Contrast Setting  
The Contrast Setting adjusts  
the print darkness of the docu-  
ment to be read.  
DARKER  
LIGHTER  
Press  
until the required contrast level is indicated  
CONTRAST  
CONTRAST  
by the appropriate LED.  
The contrast can be set to one  
of the following settings. The  
facsimile will return to the de-  
fault setting after each transac-  
tion.  
: illuminated  
The level changes as follows:  
(
)
: extinguished  
To change the default contrast  
setting, see page 85.  
(
)
Normal level when all the lamps are extinguished  
NORMAL  
For standard originals.  
Lighter level  
DARKER  
Each corresponding  
lamp is illuminated.  
To darken light originals  
(i.e., for documents with  
light or faint print).  
Darker level  
LIGHTER  
To lighten the dark originals  
(i.e., for documents with  
dark print or shaded areas).  
84  
Default Setting for Document Mode (Resolution and Contrast)  
This setting will select the de-  
Display the  
Select the  
Resolution  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Select the Contrast  
fault setting whenever a docu-  
ment is set in the facsimile for  
transmission. Manual settings  
(if selected for a particular doc-  
ument) will take precedence  
over default settings.  
1
2
4
3
DOCUMENT MODE  
Menu  
Select the desired resolution  
setting by pressing one of the  
following keys.  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
Press:  
Select the default contrast  
level by pressing one of the  
following keys.  
MENU  
Select STANDARD mode for  
sending normal text and graph-  
ics by pressing:  
Select NORMAL for normal  
documents by pressing:  
+
STOP  
+
+
+
Select DARKER to darken light  
originals (i.e., for documents  
with light or faint print) by  
pressing:  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
Select FINE mode for sending  
normal text and graphics with  
extra clarity by pressing:  
Select U-FINE (Ultra-Fine) for  
sending fine text and graphics  
with extra clarity by pressing:  
Select LIGHTER to lighten  
dark originals (i.e., for docu-  
ments with dark print) by  
pressing:  
DOCUMENT MODE  
1.STANDARD  
2.FINE  
3.U-FINE  
CONTRAST  
1.NORMAL  
COMPLETED  
2.DARKER  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
3.LIGHTER  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
85  
- COPYING  
Paper Size for Copying  
You can utilize the e-STUDIO170F as a convenient copier to make sorted copies of  
original documents. The following are key points when making copies.  
At the time of copying, the SORT function may be selected. This function will sort  
multiple page copies into sets of correct-order pages.  
Recording Paper Size  
Output Examples of Printed Copies  
The paper sizes usable with your fax unit are limited to A4, Letter or Legal size. The  
received document is recorded (printed) within the Effective Recording Area of the  
paper.  
With SORT Function ON  
With SORT Function OFF  
Paper Size  
A
B
C
D
Effective  
Recording  
Area  
A4  
: mm 210 202 289 297  
inches 8.3 7.9 11.4 11.7  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 3  
Page 2  
Page 1  
Page 1  
Page 1  
Page 1  
Page 2  
Page 2  
Page 2  
Page 3  
Page 3  
Page 3  
C D  
Letter : mm 216 208 271 279  
inches 8.5 8.2 10.7 11.0  
Legal : mm 216 208 348 356  
inches 8.5 8.2 13.7 14.0  
B
A
NOTES:  
NOTES:  
NOTE:  
The following copy resolutions are available:  
•
The pages are automatically  
•
Sorting is the responsibility of  
•
sorted.  
the operator.  
FINE  
U-FINE  
FINE+HALFTONE  
U-FINE+HALFTONE  
•
Requires enough memory for  
•
Memory requirements are limited  
to one page at a time.  
the entire multi-page document.  
If there is not enough memory  
(memory overflow), the copying  
procedure will be canceled.  
•
Collation is slower than non-col-  
lation because the entire docu-  
ment must be scanned into  
memory first, then printing can  
occur.  
86  
Copying Procedure  
Load the Document  
Press the COPY Key  
Display the SORT  
COPY Menu  
Select the SORT  
COPY Option  
Select the Paper  
Tray  
1
2
3
4
5
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Display the COPY menu by  
pressing:  
Select the desired Sort Copy  
option.  
Select the desired paper tray.  
To select Paper Tray, press:  
Use the  
key to move to the  
COPY  
To enable a Sort Copy, press:  
To disable a Sort Copy, press:  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
Sort Copy screen.  
Go to Step 8.  
Enter the number of copies re-  
quired. If no entry is made, the  
number of copies will automati-  
cally be set to “1.”  
To select Bypass Tray, press:  
To select Optional Paper Tray  
(if installed), press:  
SORT COPY  
2.OFF  
PAPER CASSETTE  
1.TRAY 1  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
COPIES  
(1-99)  
→
[ 1]  
1.ON  
2.BYPASS  
3.TRAY 2  
*
COPIES  
(1-99)  
→
NOTE:  
[ 1]  
To start copying immedi-  
ately, key in the number of  
sheets and then press the  
ENTER button.  
*
If installed Optional Paper  
Tray.  
If you select “2.BYPASS,” the  
following screen is displayed.  
Go to Step 6.  
The menu returns to the  
Standby Mode.  
PAPER SIZE  
2.LETTER  
3.LEGAL  
1.A4  
87  
Copying Procedure - continued  
Select the Paper  
Size of the Bypass  
Tray  
Select the Thick  
Paper Option  
Enter the Number of  
Copies  
6
7
8
Select the paper size of the  
Bypass Tray.  
Select the thick paper mode.  
Select the number of copies  
(max. 99).  
To enable the thick paper  
mode, press:  
To select the A4 size, press:  
To select the Letter size,  
press:  
To disable the thick paper  
mode, press:  
To select the Legal size, press:  
When all settings are complete,  
press:  
START  
THICK PAPER  
2.OFF  
1.ON  
NOTE:  
If the Sort option is se-  
lected, the document will be  
scanned into memory first.  
COPYING  
COPIES  
01/10  
NOTE:  
When the Recording Paper  
runs out during copying and  
the copying stops, supply  
the Recording Paper to re-  
start the copying.  
88  
- DIALING METHODS  
Your TOSHIBA facsimile pro-  
vides various dialing methods.  
One Touch Key Dialing  
If you have programmed a re-  
mote party’s facsimile number  
to a One Touch key, you can  
dial that number by pressing  
the corresponding One Touch  
key.  
One Touch Dialing  
Dials remote locations with  
the touch of a single key.  
See page 71 for program-  
ming.  
One Touch Key Dialing  
1
Select the desired One Touch  
key from 01 to 38 (see page 71  
for programming).  
ONE TOUCH=  
L.A. OFFICE  
01  
Abbreviated Dialing  
The resolution and contrast  
settings may be changed if  
necessary (see pages 83 and  
84).  
Dials remote locations using  
an abbreviated dial number  
from 001 to 999. See page  
65 for programming.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
To select the One Touch key  
20 to 38, press  
before  
pressing the desired One  
Touch key.  
SCANNING DOC  
FILE NBR =  
P001  
089  
Alphabet Dialing  
Allows a location selection  
using an alphabetic index  
search of the Location IDs  
programmed into One  
Touch and Abbreviated Dial-  
ing Directories.  
Example: One Touch key 01  
During scan to memory  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
One Touch key 20  
+
During transmission  
Keypad Dialing  
Accepts unregistered tele-  
phone number entry directly  
from the operation panel.  
NOTES:  
If a One Touch key is  
•
not programmed, the  
message “NUMBER  
NOT LISTED” is dis-  
played for 2 seconds, an  
alarm buzzer sounds  
and the display returns  
to the previous status  
screen.  
The One Touch key number  
and the name of the party ap-  
pear on the LCD display for  
about 2 seconds.  
See other dialing related func-  
tions on the following pages:  
Multi-Key Dialing page 109  
Your facsimile will automati-  
cally start scanning the docu-  
ment into memory (if enabled).  
While scanning, the facsimile  
dials, connects, and starts  
transmission.  
Chain Dialing  
Redialing  
page 141  
page 100  
ONE TOUCH=  
01  
Handset &  
Monitor Dialing  
pages 98  
and 99  
NUMBER NOT LISTED  
Setting Redial  
page 61  
•
When an incorrect One  
Touch key has been se-  
Interval & Counter  
STOP  
lected, press  
im-  
mediately to cancel the  
transmission.  
89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
Once an Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber is programmed with a valid  
remote facsimile location, that  
location can be accessed by  
recalling the corresponding Ab-  
breviated Dial Number.  
Press the SPEED  
DIAL Key  
Enter the  
Abbreviated Number  
Press the START Key Tray  
1
2
3
Press:  
When the correct number is  
displayed, press:  
Enter the Abbreviated Dial  
Number (1 to 999) assigned to  
the desired party.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
SPEED DIAL  
ALPHA  
+
START  
The document must be loaded  
and the resolution and contrast  
set before a transmission using  
Abbreviated Dialing (see pages  
83 and 84).  
During transmission  
The Abbreviated Dial Number  
and the name of the party will  
appear on the LCD display for  
about 2 seconds.  
NOTE:  
When the number entered  
(within the range of 1  
ABB. NUMBER  
(1-999)  
through 999) is not prepro-  
grammed with a specific  
party’s facsimile or tele-  
phone number, the mes-  
sage “NUMBER NOT LIST-  
ED” is displayed for 2 sec-  
onds and then the facsimile  
returns to the screen in  
Step 1.  
[ ]  
Your facsimile will automatical-  
ly start scanning the document  
into memory (if enabled). While  
scanning, the facsimile dials,  
connects, and starts transmis-  
sion.  
NOTES:  
•
When an incorrect num-  
ber is entered, use  
to delete preceding dig-  
ABB. NBR=  
10  
ABB. NBR=  
10  
LONDON OFFICE  
NUMBER NOT LISTED  
STOP  
its, or press  
once  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
to start over from the be-  
ginning.  
•
Any leading zero (0) can  
be omitted from the Ab-  
breviated Dial Number.  
SCANNING DOC P001  
FILE NBR =  
091  
During scan to memory  
Example of Abbreviated Dial  
Number, 10:  
ABB. NUMBER  
(1-999)  
[ 10]  
90  
Alphabet Dialing  
“Alphabet Dialing” is used to  
dial the desired party by  
searching for the name of the  
registered Location ID name in  
the Abbreviated Dial, One  
Touch Dial and Group Dial List.  
Display the Name of  
the Desired Remote  
Party  
Press the SPEED  
DIAL Key  
Press the START  
Key  
1
2
3
Press the key on the dial key-  
pad which corresponds to the  
name.  
Once the desired name is dis-  
played, press:  
Press:  
SPEED DIAL  
ALPHA  
+
START  
The document must be loaded  
and the resolution and contrast  
set before a transmission using  
Alphabet Dialing (see pages 83  
and 84).  
Example:  
To find the location named  
“LONDON OFFICE”:  
The One Touch key or Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number and the name  
of the party appear on the LCD  
display for about 2 seconds.  
Press  
3 times to display  
SEARCH LETTER = 1  
the screen for names beginning  
with “L.”  
Your facsimile will automati-  
cally start scanning the docu-  
ment into memory (if enabled).  
While scanning, the facsimile  
dials, connects, and starts  
transmission.  
SEARCH LETTER = L  
L.A. OFFICE  
Use the following keys to dis-  
play the desired location (“LON-  
DON OFFICE” in this ex-  
ample).  
ABB. NBR=  
LONDON OFFICE  
002  
MENU  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
or  
SCANNING DOC P001  
SEARCH LETTER = L  
LONDON OFFICE  
FILE NBR =  
091  
During scan to memory  
NOTE:  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Press the  
or  
to move  
During transmission  
to the next initial letter.  
91  
Keypad Dialing  
If you have not preset the tele-  
phone number of the destina-  
tion facsimile to an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number or One  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
Press the START  
Key  
1
2
Touch key, you can dial your  
destination by entering the  
number from the Dial Keypad.  
Enter the facsimile number of  
the desired party.  
When the correct number is  
displayed, press:  
START  
The document must be loaded  
and the resolution and contrast  
set before a transmission using  
Keypad Dialing. (See pages 83  
and 84.)  
Your facsimile will automati-  
cally start scanning the docu-  
ment into memory (if enabled).  
While scanning, the facsimile  
will dials, connects, and starts  
transmission.  
NOTE:  
When an incorrect number  
SCANNING DOC P001  
FILE NBR =  
093  
is entered, use  
to delete  
During scan to memory  
preceding digits, or press  
STOP  
once to start over  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
from the beginning.  
During transmission  
Example with 012345678 en-  
tered:  
TELNUMBER=(MAX128)  
012345678  
92  
- TRANSMITTING  
Memory Transmission  
A Memory Transmission first scans and stores the document into memory prior to  
a transmission to a remote facsimile(s).  
File Number and Residual Memory  
•
FILE NUMBERS  
The facsimile assigns a File Number to each transmission or polling-recep-  
tion job for internal control of reserved communications.  
This File Number is very useful, should it become necessary to cancel a  
memory operation. It is also useful when tracking communication activities  
using the transmission and reception journals (see page 186).  
Memory Transmission is automatically initiated with any of the following dialing  
methods.  
• One Touch Dialing  
• Abbreviated Dialing  
• Alphabet Dialing  
• Keypad Dialing  
(See page 89)  
(See page 90)  
(See page 91)  
(See page 92)  
File Number Display Example:  
You may reserve a transmission even when other Memory Communications are un-  
der way.  
SCANNING DOC  
FILE NBR =  
P001  
123  
File No.  
Once scanning a document is started, the facsimile will dial, connect and start  
transmission to the remote location. In the event the Memory becomes full,  
Memory Release will hold originals in the ADF until the pages already stored into  
memory are successfully transmitted. As each page is successfully transmitted,  
the Memory for subsequent pages will be released and the next page is scanned.  
•
RESIDUAL MEMORY  
The amount of memory remaining for memory transmission usage is called  
Residual Memory and is displayed as a percentage value.  
Residual Memory Display Example:  
If a connection is not established during the scanning procedure, Memory Release  
will be disabled (see NOTES).  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 70%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Residual Memory  
To bypass Memory Transmission, see page 96 on Direct Document Transmission.  
NOTES:  
1. If there is not enough Residual Memory or the  
Job queue it at full capacity, a Memory Full  
status may occur. If this occurs during scan-  
ning a document for transmission, the fac-  
simile displays MEMORY OVERFLOW.  
STOP  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
MEMORYOVERFLOW  
2. If this message is displayed, press  
to cancel the Memory Transmis-  
sion. The Memory Overflow message will be reset and the document will be  
ejected.  
3. Wait until memory becomes available (i.e., after some reserved jobs are  
completed), and retry the job later or use a Direct Document Transmission  
(see page 95).  
4. A maximum of 100 transmissions can be reserved for Memory Transmis-  
sions (including Polling Reception reservations and mailboxes). Any trans-  
mission attempted thereafter will result in a direct transmission from the  
ADF.  
93  
Memory Transmission - continued  
Memory Transmission Procedure  
Load the Document  
Dial the Facsimile  
Number  
Start Scanning  
Return to the  
Standby Mode  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 83).  
The facsimile starts scanning  
and storing the document into  
memory.  
Dial the facsimile number of  
the remote party using any of  
the four dialing methods.  
When the document scanning  
is complete, the facsimile re-  
turns to the Standby Mode.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
A File Number is assigned.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Residual Memory will decrease  
as the document is scanned.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
STOP  
•
Press  
to cancel the  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
transmission operation.  
SCANNING DOC  
FILE NBR =  
P001  
108  
STOP  
•
Press  
if a dialing er-  
ror occurs.  
Example of screen displayed  
while a number is entered by  
Keypad Dialing:  
TEL NUMBER =(MAX128)  
0559761234  
94  
Direct Transmission  
Direct Transmission is used if  
there is not enough residual  
memory or when a large num-  
ber of document pages are to  
be sent, etc.  
Direct Transmission as a Default Setting  
Load the Document  
Dial the Facsimile  
Number  
Start Dialing  
Line Connection to  
the Remote Party  
1
2
3
4
This mode is also useful if the  
operator wishes to visually  
confirm the actual transmission  
of the document to the remote  
party.  
This procedure will discuss Di-  
rect Transmission when se-  
lected as the default setting or  
when Residual Memory has  
been depleted.  
Once the facsimile number is  
entered, the dialing starts.  
Once connected to the desti-  
nation facsimile, the screen  
below is displayed.  
Dial the facsimile number of  
the remote party using any of  
the four dialing methods.  
The documents will remain in  
the ADF and be transmitted  
one by one.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
DIALING  
COMMUNICATING  
+81 559 761234  
0559761234  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
All transmissions will be sent  
via Direct Transmission if the  
Memory Transmission function  
is set default off (See page  
142).  
If the destination facsimile is  
busy, the screen below is dis-  
played.  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
WAITING TO REDIAL  
AUTO RECEIVE  
STOP  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
•
Press  
if a dialing er-  
If the redial procedure is com-  
pleted without a success, the  
screen below is displayed and  
printed the Transmission Re-  
port.  
ror occurs.  
Example of screen displayed  
when Residual Memory has  
been depleted:  
Example of screen displayed  
while a number is entered us-  
ing Keypad Dialing:  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 0%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
PRINTING LIST  
TEL NUMBER =(MAX128)  
0559761234  
After printing  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
LINE BUSY  
95  
Direct Transmission - continued  
Direct Transmission as a Default Setting - continued  
Document  
Transmission  
Complete the  
Transmission  
5
6
The transmission starts as the  
document is scanned, the  
screen below is displayed.  
When the communication is  
complete, BUSY lamp turns  
off and the facsimile returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
TRANSMIT  
+81 559 761234  
P001  
96  
Direct Transmission - continued  
Temporary Direct Transmission  
Even if the Memory Transmis-  
Load the Document  
Change the  
Transmission Mode  
Select YES  
Dial the Facsimile  
Number  
sion Mode is selected as the  
default, you may desire to  
transmit a specific document  
directly from the Automatic  
Document Feeder.  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select the desired function key  
on the operation panel.  
Select “1. YES” by pressing:  
Dial the facsimile number of  
the remote party using any of  
the four dialing methods.  
This is useful when the docu-  
ment consists of many pages  
or when the residual memory is  
too small to store the docu-  
ment data.  
Press:  
DIRECT SEND  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
DIRECT TX  
1.YES  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
2.NO  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
97  
Direct Transmission - continued  
On-hook Transmission (Monitor Speaker Dialing)  
You can send your documents  
Load the Document  
Press the MONITOR  
Key  
Dial the Facsimile  
Number  
Press the START  
Key  
with On-hook Dialing using the  
monitor speaker to confirm the  
answering tone from the re-  
mote party’s facsimile.  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
Dial the facsimile number of  
the remote party using any of  
the four dialing methods.  
When you hear the answering  
MONITOR  
START  
tone, press  
.
The facsimile is connected to  
the telephone line and the dial  
tone is heard through the  
speaker.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Upon hearing the facsimile  
tone, press:  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
START  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
TELNUMBER=(MAX128)  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
[
]
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
When the transmission is com-  
pleted, the facsimile returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
NOTE:  
If an incorrect number is  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
STOP  
dialed, press  
and  
follow the instruction dis-  
played on the LCD display  
to start the operation over.  
Example of screen displayed  
while a number is entered us-  
ing Keypad Dialing:  
TELNUMBER=(MAX128)  
[0559761234  
]
98  
Direct Transmission - continued  
External Off-hook Transmission (Transmission Using an External Telephone)  
This procedure may be useful  
Load the Document  
PickUptheHandsetof  
the External Telephone  
Dial on the External  
Telephone  
Press The START  
Key  
when you want to talk with a  
remote party before sending a  
document. A telephone set  
must be connected to the  
“TEL” connector. (This tele-  
phone set is called the “Exter-  
nal Telephone” in this manual.)  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Dial the facsimile number of  
the remote party using the  
keypad of the External Tele-  
phone.  
When you hear the answering  
Pick up the handset of the Ex-  
ternal Telephone connected to  
the “TEL” connector of the fac-  
simile.  
START  
tone, press  
on the  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
facsimile. If the remote party  
answers the phone, you can  
inform the remote party that  
you wish to send a document.  
The entered number is immedi-  
ately dialed. The number is  
not displayed on the facsimi-  
le’s LCD display.  
The External Telephone is con-  
nected to the telephone line via  
the facsimile, and the dial tone  
is heard through the speaker of  
the External Telephone.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Upon hearing the facsimile  
tone, press:  
NOTE:  
The display on the facsimile  
shows “EXTERNAL OFF  
HOOK” on the LCD display.  
When the External Tele-  
phone is in the off-hook  
status (i.e. while “EXTER-  
NAL OFF HOOK” is dis-  
played), the Dial Keypad on  
the facsimile does not ac-  
cept any key entry.  
START  
EXTERNAL OFF HOOK  
Then replace the handset of  
the External Telephone.  
When the transmission is com-  
pleted, the facsimile returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
99  
Redialing  
Automatic Redialing  
Manual Redialing Direct Transmission  
When the line of the remote  
party is busy, the facsimile will  
automatically redial the remote  
party up to the set number of  
times with intervals of the set  
length (see page 61).  
This function enables you to  
Press the MONITOR  
Key  
Press the REDIAL  
Key  
Redial the Remote  
Party  
redial the number last dialed  
using this facsimile to transmit  
a document.  
1
2
3
Press:  
To enter the On-hook Dialing  
(Monitor Speaker Dialing)  
mode, press:  
When you hear the answering  
WARNING:  
REDIAL  
PAUSE  
START  
STOP  
If the line is not connected af-  
ter the set number of redialing  
attempts, the facsimile will  
record a LINE BUSY.  
tone, press  
. If the  
If you press  
, the  
MONITOR  
The last number dialed is dis-  
played. The display varies de-  
pending on the dialing method  
used.  
facsimile will clear the fac-  
simile number registered  
and lose the manual redial  
capability.  
remote party answers the  
phone, pick up the handset.  
Inform the remote party that  
you wish to send a document.  
Confirm the facsimile number  
of the remote party and repeat  
the transmission procedure.  
TELNUMBER=(MAX128)  
[
]
The displayed number is im-  
mediately redialed.  
Upon hearing the facsimile  
tone, press:  
NOTE:  
This feature will not func-  
tion with numbers dialed  
using an external tele-  
phone.  
START  
TELNUMBER=(MAX128)  
[0559761234  
]
When the transmission is com-  
pleted, the facsimile returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
If no number is registered as a  
redial number, the screen be-  
low is displayed for 2 seconds,  
then returns to Step 1.  
TELNUMBER=(MAX128)  
NUMBER NOT LISTED  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
100  
Redialing - continued  
Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory  
This function enables you to  
Press the REDIAL  
Key  
Select the Job to be Redialed  
Start Redialing  
transmit a document after se-  
lecting it from the jobs reserved  
in memory waiting to be  
redialed.  
1
2
3
Press:  
Wait 5 seconds or press any  
key on the Operation Panel ex-  
STOP  
When the desired job is dis-  
played, press:  
FILE NBR =  
L.A. OFFICE  
121  
REDIAL  
PAUSE  
NOTE:  
cept  
to display the  
If you are using Department  
Codes, the initiating Depart-  
ment Code must match for  
this operation to work.  
MENU  
REDIAL  
[ENTER]:START  
screen on the right.  
Screen Index:  
The facsimile starts to dial the  
number for a transmission.  
FILE NBR =  
SEATTLE FACTORY  
123  
1st line ... File Number  
•
If there are no jobs to be  
redialed, the screen below  
is displayed for 2 seconds,  
then the facsimile returns to  
the Standby Mode.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
2nd line ... Destination of  
redialing  
MENU  
Locate the screen of the de-  
sired job using the following  
scroll keys.  
FILE NBR =  
L.A. OFFICE  
124  
REDIAL  
NUMBER NOT LISTED  
MENU  
(for the previous screen)  
(for the next screen)  
101  
- RECEIVING  
Automatic Reception Mode  
FAX/TAD Switching Mode  
“AUTO RECEIVE” is the ability of the facsimile to receive docu-  
ments sent to your facsimile automatically.  
This mode is used together with a TAD (telephone answering device/machine).  
This mode allows you to receive voice messages and facsimile receptions even when no one is  
present in the office.  
The facsimile starts to receive a document after a pre-selected  
number of rings. You can change the ringer count (see page 62).  
Switching between the voice message recording and facsimile receiving is performed automatically.  
NOTE:  
( )  
1 Caller in Automatic  
A ring delay can be selected should you wish to speak to the  
calling party before receiving a facsimile.  
If you do not pick up the handset within the selected delay pe-  
riod, the facsimile will automatically answer the call and at-  
tempt to receive a document.  
Detects the facsimile signal  
Facsimile Transmission  
Mode  
Answering  
Message  
TAD  
TAD  
Tone  
Beep  
TAD records the  
voice message.  
( )  
Facsimile  
Automatic  
Reception  
Mode  
2 Caller in Attempting a  
Phone Call  
(
)
Silence Detection  
Recording is  
completed.  
( )  
3 Caller in Manual  
Facsimile Transmission  
Mode  
Silence Detection  
Caller starts sending  
the document  
FAX Monitor Time*  
Max. 99 seconds  
(
)
Refer to 63.  
FAX Monitor Time:  
When the voice message recording is completed earlier than the FAX Monitor Time, the  
line will be switched to the facsimile side. However, if the voice message recording  
exceeds the time value, the line will not be switched to the facsimile side.  
(1) Caller in Automatic Facsimile Transmission Mode  
When the facsimile signal is detected during or after the TAD Answering Message switching is  
automatically made for Facsimile Reception mode.  
(2) Caller Attempting a Phone Call  
After the TAD Answering Message and the TAD Beep Tone, the TAD will record the message  
from the caller.  
(3) Caller in Manual Facsimile Transmission Mode (may first leave a voice message if within the  
FAX Monitor Time)  
When the caller starts a facsimile transmission during the Answering Message or after the TAD  
Beep Tone, switching is made for Facsimile Reception mode.  
102  
Manual Receiving Mode  
TEL/FAX Auto Switching Mode  
“MANUAL RECEIVE” allows you to use the facsimile as a tele-  
phone (talking function) first and then start a document reception  
by pressing:  
This mode is used when the line is used for both facsimile and telephone.  
The facsimile automatically determines whether an incoming call is for facsimile or telephone. When  
the call is for telephone, the ringer will ring according to the value set for the call time. When the call  
is for facsimile, the machine will automatically start receiving the document.  
START  
If the other party is sending a document, the facsimile automatically receives the document. If the  
other party is making a phone call, the facsimile goes on to generate a pseudo-rings.  
1. When the facsimile rings, pick up the handset and talk with  
the remote party.  
2. If you hear the facsimile tone through the handset instead of  
an operator’s voice, you may manually initiate a facsimile re-  
ception by pressing:  
START  
3. Replace the handset to the cradle. The facsimile will start re-  
ceiving the document.  
(1) Caller in Automatic Facsimile Transmission Mode  
Detects the facsimile signal and the facsimile will engage Auto Reception mode.  
(2) Caller in Manual Facsimile Transmission Mode  
If you pick up the handset of the external telephone during the Pseudo Ringer period, you can  
START  
talk with the caller, then press  
to start receiving a document. When the Pseudo Ringer  
period ends (because no one answers), the facsimile is automatically switched to Facsimile Re-  
ception mode. In this mode, the remote party can manually send a document as well.  
(3) Caller Attempting a Phone Call  
You can talk with the caller if you pick up the handset of the external telephone during the  
STOP  
Pseudo Ringer period. When using a connected external telephone, you must press  
talk with the caller.  
to  
103  
Selecting the Reception Mode  
Recording Paper Size  
The Automatic Reception  
Mode (AUTO RECEIVE) is nor-  
mally selected. You can  
If Auto Receive mode is se-  
lected, press:  
This facsimile can use A4, Letter and Legal size paper. The received document is recorded (printed)  
within the Effective Recording Area of the paper.  
change the reception mode by  
AUTO  
D
Paper Size  
A4 : mm 210 202 289 279  
inches 8.3  
11.7  
A
B
C
pressing the  
key.  
Effective  
Recording  
Area  
If FAX/TAD mode is selected,  
press:  
C D  
Refer to Reception Mode se-  
lection on page 62.  
7.9 11.4  
Letter: mm 216 208 271 279  
inches 8.5 8.2 10.7 11.0  
B
A
Press:  
356  
AUTO  
Legal : mm 216 208 348  
If TEL/FAX mode is selected,  
press:  
inches 8.5 8.2 13.7 14.0  
RECEPTION MODE  
1.FAX  
NOTES:  
•
If the received document is equal to or shorter than the recording area of the paper, the re-  
ceived document is printed at its actual size.  
2.FAX/TAD  
3.TEL/FAX  
4.MANUAL  
If Manual Receive mode is se-  
lected, press:  
•
If the received document is larger than the recording area of the paper, it will be vertically and  
horizontally reduced to fit on the recording paper installed. The reception will be divided onto  
two sheets if the document needs to be reduced to smaller than 73%* of its original size.  
*Reduction standard ratio for every paper  
Document  
Recording  
Paper  
•
If you desire to receive large originals without reduction or excessive paper usage, set the  
“DISCARD” function to “ON.” If the lower part of the original exceeds the recording paper by 13  
mm or less, the image will be automatically discarded. This predetermined dimension is a ser-  
vice function setting. Contact your Toshiba dealer for setup.  
•
If the “RX REDUCTION” function is “OFF”, the larger original will be recorded on two or more  
sheets. The top of the second page will repeat about 5 mm of the lower part of the first page.  
104  
- COMMUNICATION STATUS  
Current Job Status  
Communication Journal  
The job being processed can  
be monitored via the LCD. You  
can cancel the job if neces-  
sary.  
A Communication Journal (or  
Transmission Journal and Re-  
ception Journal separately) can  
be issued to confirm the last  
40 transmissions and 40 recep-  
tions.  
Continue or Cancel  
the Job  
Press the JOB  
STATUS Key  
Select YES or NO  
2
1
3
In the Standby Mode, press:  
With the phone line status in  
Step 1 displayed, you can ei-  
ther continue or cancel the job.  
To continue, wait for the fac-  
simile to return to the Standby  
STOP  
Press one of the following  
keys.  
NOTES:  
•
When no communication  
job is being processed,  
only the number of re-  
served jobs is displayed  
as below.  
JOB STATUS  
With the Standby Mode screen  
displayed, select the function  
key on the operation panel.  
To cancel the job, press:  
The following screen shows an  
example of the Job Status dis-  
play when the phone line is in  
use for 10 seconds (BUSY  
lamp blinking):  
Mode or press  
.
Press:  
To continue without cancelling  
the job, press:  
PENDING JOBS=  
x
JOURNAL  
JOB CANCEL TO CANCEL  
To cancel and erase the dis-  
played job, press:  
A communication journal is is-  
sued automatically when 40  
transmissions or receptions are  
completed if programmed.  
(See page 178)  
TRANSMIT  
+81 425 85 3002  
P005  
•
When no jobs are re-  
served or being pro-  
cessed, the screen be-  
low is displayed for 2  
seconds.  
JOB CANCEL  
While the screen above is dis-  
CANCEL?  
1.YES  
JOB STATUS  
played, pressing  
will dis-  
play the Pending Job for 10  
seconds.  
2.NO  
NO ENTRY  
PENDING JOBS=  
x
JOB CANCEL TO CANCEL  
105  
- CANCELLING A COMMUNICATION JOB  
Cancelling a Direct Transmission  
Cancelling a Job Reservation  
Reserved jobs can be can-  
A Document is  
Being Transmitted  
Press the STOP Key  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Display the JOB  
CANCEL Menu  
celled while they remain in  
memory. The following 5 types  
of jobs can be cancelled using  
this procedure.  
1
2
3
1
A screen such as the one be-  
low is displayed while a docu-  
ment is being transmitted in  
the Direct Transmission Mode.  
Press:  
Select the desired option.  
In the Standby Mode, press:  
STOP  
JOB CANCEL  
To cancel the transmission,  
press:  
1. TRANSMIT  
2. RECEIVE  
3. POLLING  
4. POLLING RESERVE  
5. JOB NUMBER  
TRANSMIT  
+81 425 86 7449  
P001  
CANCEL ?  
1.+81425867449  
JOB CANCEL  
1.TRANSMIT  
After the document exits, the  
menu returns to the Standby  
Mode.  
2.NO  
2.RECEIVE  
3.POLLING  
4.POLLINGRESERVE  
5.JOB NUMBER  
To continue the transmission,  
press:  
NOTE:  
The types of jobs displayed  
within the Job Cancel  
screen will vary depending  
upon the actual job types  
currently in use.  
If a job type is not currently  
active, it will not appear on  
the LCD screen.  
106  
Cancelling a Job Reservation - continued  
Select the Job Type  
Enter JOB NUMBER  
Cancel Other Jobs  
Press the ENTER to  
Cancel the Job  
2
3
4
5
Select the desired job type.  
Enter the job number you want  
to cancel.  
When the desired job screen is  
displayed, press:  
[SET]:CANCEL  
[↑ ↓]:SEARCH  
Display the status of the de-  
MENU  
A screen like the one below is  
displayed.  
sired job by using  
and/or  
.
CANCEL ?  
1.YES  
Go to Step 5.  
The operation and screen to  
follow varies for each item  
number selected.  
2.NO  
JOB NUMBER ?  
[ ]  
Previous Job in the List  
If you selected 2.RECEIVE, go  
to Step 3.  
To confirm deletion, press:  
MENU  
Go to Step 5.  
If you selected 5.JOB NUM-  
BER, go to Step 3.  
JOB CANCELLED  
FILE NBR =  
123  
If you selected:  
MENU  
1. TRANSMIT  
return to Standby Mode.  
3. POLLING  
4. POLLING RESERVE  
To not cancel the selection,  
press:  
Go to Step 4.  
Next Job in the List  
107  
ADVANCED FUNCTIONS - MULTI-ADDRESS TRANSMISSION (BROADCASTING)  
Group Broadcast Transmission  
The Group Broadcast Trans-  
Load the Document  
Select the Group  
Location  
Enter the Group  
Number  
Press the START  
Key  
mission feature allows you to  
send a document to multiple  
remote parties in a single oper-  
ation.  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press the One Touch Key pro-  
grammed for the desired group.  
Enter the Multi-address Trans-  
mission Group Number (1 to  
1999).  
When the correct Group Num-  
ber is displayed, press:  
Note that a Group Broadcast  
Transmission requires all pag-  
es to be scanned to memory  
prior to dialing, and thus ade-  
quate residual memory is re-  
quired.  
START  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
EXAMPLE:  
To enter the Group Number  
0001, press:  
ONE TOUCH =  
COLORADO GRP  
05  
GROUP NBR =  
COLORADO GRP  
0001  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
After 2 seconds:  
NOTES:  
(Leading zeros, if any, may  
be omitted.)  
•
Up to 50 groups can be  
assigned.  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR = xxx  
•
To confirm the Group  
Number Registration,  
see the Group Number  
List. (See page 199.)  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR = xxx  
NOTES:  
When document scan-  
ning is completed:  
•
When an incorrect num-  
When document scan-  
ning is completed:  
Standby Mode screen  
ber is entered, use  
Standby Mode screen  
Or, display the Group Dial Di-  
rectory by pressing:  
to delete the preceding  
STOP  
digits, or press  
SPEED DIAL  
once to start over from  
the beginning.  
ALPHA  
+
•
Any leading zero (0) can  
be omitted from the Ab-  
breviated Dial Number.  
GROUP NBR =(1-1999)  
[ ]  
GROUP NBR =(1-1999)  
[ 1]  
108  
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission  
The Multi-Key Quick Broadcast  
Transmission allows docu-  
ments to be sent to a combina-  
tion of the following numbers  
Load the Document  
Press the MULTI  
Key  
Enter the Facsimile Number  
1
2
3
without pre-programming a  
group.  
Enter the facsimile number of  
the remote party using any of  
the four dialing methods.  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
Repeat this step until the fac-  
simile numbers of all the de-  
sired remote parties are en-  
tered.  
When the facsimile numbers of  
all the desired remote parties  
are entered, go to Step 5.  
MULTI  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Dial Keys  
(See page 89)  
CHARGE CODE  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
(See page 90)  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialed Numbers  
(See page 91)  
To cancel or retain a facsimile  
number already programmed to  
a Manual Group Dial, go to  
Step 4.  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
MULTI GROUP  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
Keypad Dialed Numbers  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
(See page 92)  
NOTE:  
Up to 288 destinations can  
A screen like the one below is  
displayed.  
be assigned in total using  
the Keypad Dialed Num-  
bers, One Touch Dial keys  
and Alphabet Dialed Num-  
bers. However, up to 100  
destinations can be as-  
signed using only the Key-  
pad Dialed Numbers.  
ABB NBR=  
INFORMATIONBUREAU  
154  
After 2 seconds:  
ENTER MORE OR  
PRESS [START]  
NOTE:  
If you select the same entry  
twice, you are prompted to  
delete or retain that second  
entry.  
109  
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission - continued  
Press the START  
Key  
Select the CANCEL or RETAIN Facsimile Number  
5
4
You can cancel or retain the  
Manual Group Dial Number reg-  
istered in this facsimile.  
Select the number you want to  
MENU  
Press:  
4a  
4b  
CanceltheExisting  
Number  
RetaintheExisting  
Number  
START  
To cancel the existing number,  
press:  
To retain the existing number,  
press:  
delete or retain using  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR= XXX  
or  
, and press:  
(to CANCEL)  
(to RETAIN)  
When document  
scanning is completed:  
Standby Mode screen  
ALREADYASSIGNED  
1.CANCEL  
ABB NBR=  
ARE YOU SURE ?  
154  
ENTER MORE OR  
PRESS [START]  
2.RETAIN  
Then press:  
Return to Step 3.  
To select “1.CANCEL,” go to  
Step 4a.  
To select “2.RETAIN,” go to  
Step 4b.  
ABB NBR=  
CANCELLED  
154  
Return to Step 3.  
110  
- RELAY TRANSMISSION  
Relay Transmission, Relay-Relay Transmission Overview  
To perform Relay Transmissions or Relay-Relay Transmissions, you must build a  
network beforehand.  
What is a “Relay Transmission”?  
A relay transmission is used to send documents from your facsimile (origina-  
tor) to a Hub Station, which then sends them to additional end stations. If you  
have several stations in one or more regional areas (e.g. Los Angeles Metro,  
New York City, Dallas-Ft. Worth, Seattle-Tacoma, etc.); you can save time  
and phone charges by setting up a relay system. By sending your document  
to a Hub Station, you can then instruct the Hub Station to retransmit the docu-  
ment to the end stations in their local geographical area.  
Consult your authorized TOSHIBA dealer for assistance in using this function.  
Conditions for a Relay/Relay-Relay Transmission Network  
1. The originator station must be an ITU-T relay communication compatible fac-  
simile unit such as TOSHIBA DP120F/DP125F/e-STUDIO170F.  
2. The Hub Station must be an ITU-T relay communication compatible facsimile  
unit with Hub Station functions such as DP120F/DP125F.  
End Station Group  
(
stations to finally re-  
NOTE: The e-STUDIO170F can only function as an originator station.  
)
ceive the document  
Hub  
Station  
Originator  
Station  
3. The Relay Hub Station must have the end station settings pre-programmed  
as a Relay Box.  
End Station  
4. Due to advanced planning and setup requirements for the Relay-Relay trans-  
missions involving two or more Hub Station transfers, contact your autho-  
rized TOSHIBA dealer for detailed instructions.  
What is a “Relay-Relay Transmission”?  
A Relay Transmission where two levels of Hub Stations are involved is called  
a Relay-Relay Transmission. In a Relay-Relay Transmission, the first Hub  
Station sends the document to another Hub Station(s) which then transmits  
them to additional end stations.  
End Station Group  
stations to finally re-  
(
)
ceive the document  
Second  
Hub Station  
End Station  
Hub  
Station  
Originator  
Station  
End Station  
End Station  
Second  
Hub Station  
111  
Relay Transmission Originating Procedure  
This section describes the pro-  
Load the Document  
Display the MAILBOX  
Menu  
Select the RELAY  
REQUEST  
Enter the Box  
Number  
cedures to send a document to  
Relay Box in a relay station.  
The relay station must be com-  
pliant with ITU-T F-code com-  
munications. For more informa-  
tion, see page 111.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Press:  
Enter the Box Number (max.  
20 digits).  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
MENU  
+
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
NOTE:  
The destination relay box  
must be setup in the remote  
hub unit prior to sending  
documents.  
+
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
BOX NUMBER  
[
]
Then press:  
02.BULLETINBOARD  
03.RELAYREQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
SETUP PASSWORD  
2.NO  
1.YES  
112  
Relay Transmission Originating Procedure - continued  
Select the Password  
Option  
Enter the Password  
Dial the Remote Hub  
Unit  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
6
7
8
Enter the password to access  
the Relay Box.  
If the relay station is a pass-  
word is programmed, press:  
Enter the facsimile number of  
the remote hub unit using any  
of the following dialing meth-  
ods.  
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document into memory.  
The following screen is dis-  
played for about 2 seconds be-  
fore returning to the Standby  
Mode.  
Go to Step 6.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
If the relay station is not a  
password is programmed,  
press:  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR=  
231  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
Then press:  
Go to Step 7.  
SEND(RELAY)  
ENTER FAX NUMBER  
TELNUMBER=(MAX128)  
[123  
]
113  
- POLLING & MAILBOX COMMUNICATIONS  
The e-STUDIO170F features  
advanced Polling and Mailbox  
functions designed to provide  
Polling & Mailbox Overview  
remote document retrieval ca-  
pabilities. In addition, the e-  
STUDIO170F is a “Hub” type  
unit where documents can be  
stored and polled by other fac-  
similes (with polling capabilities  
to retrieve documents from the  
e-STUDIO170F).  
Polling Reservation  
Polling Reception  
Polling Reservation allows documents to be stored in the e-  
STUDIO170F so that other facsimile machines can remotely re-  
trieve (Poll) those documents. The following types of polling reser-  
vations are available.  
Polling Reception is the ability to call up another facsimile and re-  
motely retrieve a document stored within the remote facsimile.  
The following types of polling receptions are available.  
Simple Polling  
Simple  
The e-STUDIO170F can call any other facsimile with polling  
reservation capabilities to remotely retrieve a document. See  
page 121.  
Documents can be reserved for a one time polling operation  
using the facsimile’s memory so that any facsimile with polling  
reception capabilities can remotely retrieve the document. See  
page 116.  
Secure Polling  
The e-STUDIO170F can call another TOSHIBA facsimile with  
security polling reservation capabilities to remotely retrieve a  
document using a 4-digit security code. See page 121.  
Security  
Documents can be reserved for a one time polling operation  
that requires a 4-digit security code to be entered prior to send-  
ing the document. Security reservation is only available when  
communicating with other TOSHIBA facsimiles. See page 116.  
Multi Address Polling  
Multi Address Polling allows the e-STUDIO170F to sequen-  
tially poll multiple remote facsimiles using a group of facsimile  
numbers stored as a group directory or as a MULTI key opera-  
tion. See page 123.  
Multi Mailbox  
Documents can be reserved for multiple polling operations us-  
ing the facsimile’s memory so that any facsimile with polling  
capabilities can remotely retrieve the document. See page  
119.  
114  
Polling & Mailbox Overview - Continued  
Open Mailbox (ITU-T Compatible)  
The Open Mailbox is a new international standard for mailbox communications. Open Mailbox (ITU-T  
F-code communications) allows storage and retrieval of documents via mailboxes that comply with  
this standard. The e-STUDIO170F is a hub unit that has document storage capabilities so that ITU-T  
F-Code compliant remote units can retrieve documents from the e-STUDIO170F. Prior to utilizing  
Open Mailbox, mailboxes must be created in the e-STUDIO170F. Following two types of Mailboxes  
are available.  
Confidential Box  
Confidential box allows a one time document retrieval from the mailbox. Once a document is re-  
trieved, it is cleared. If a new document is stored using the same box number where another  
document is already present, it is added to the existing one. It is possible to setup a password  
requirement for accessing the Confidential Box for document retrieval to prevent unauthorized re-  
trieval of documents. This password is used only when retrieving documents and not used during  
document reservation.  
Bulletin Board Box  
Bulletin Board box allows multiple document retrievals from the mailbox. If a new document is  
stored using the same Box number where another document is already present, it replaces the  
existing one. It is possible to setup a password requirement for accessing the Bulletin Board Box  
for document reservation during setup. This password is used only when reserving documents  
from a remote facsimile or the local hub and not used during document retrieval.  
1. To setup an Open Mailbox, see page 125.  
2. To delete an Open Mailbox, see page 127.  
3. To reserve a document to a remote hub, see page 129.  
4. To reserve a document to a local e-STUDIO170F, see page 131.  
5. To retrieve (Poll) a document from a remote hub, see page 133.  
6. To retrieve (Print) a document from a local e-STUDIO170F, see page 135.  
7. To delete a document from an Open Mailbox, see page 137.  
115  
Simple & Security Polling Reservation  
This procedure allows the e-  
STUDIO170F to send a docu-  
ment to another remote facsim-  
ile when requested. In addition,  
Load the Document  
Display the  
POLLING Menu  
Select POLLING  
RESERVE  
Select POLL ONCE  
BOX  
1
2
3
4
documents can be protected  
Load the document face down  
Press:  
Select “02.POLLING RE-  
SERVE” by pressing:  
Select “1.POLL ONCE BOX”  
by pressing:  
from unauthorized remote fac-  
in the Document Support (see  
MENU  
similes by using security  
page 82).  
codes. Two types of security  
+
codes are offered.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
4-Digit Security Code  
+
When the 4-digit security code  
is selected as the check code,  
the document can only be re-  
ceived by TOSHIBA facsimiles  
with the matching security  
code.  
POLLING  
01.POLLING  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
POLLINGRESERVE  
1.POLL ONCE BOX  
SECURITY FAX NUMBER  
1.NO  
02.POLLINGRESERVE  
2.MULTI POLL BOX  
2.SECURITYCODE  
3.FAX NUMBER  
Facsimile Number  
If a facsimile number is se-  
lected as the check code, the  
remote facsimile’s Transmit  
Terminal Identification (TTI) is  
checked prior to document  
transmission. This type of se-  
curity code can be used with  
facsimiles made by other  
manufacturers.  
4.SECURITY FAX NBR  
This TTI must be properly pro-  
grammed into the remote fac-  
simile for this procedure to  
function.  
NOTES:  
•
Only one Simple Polling  
reservation can be set at  
one time.  
•
Simple Polling reserva-  
tion is not available if a  
document is reserved in  
the Multi Mailbox.  
116  
Simple & Security Polling Reservation - continued  
6a Select SECURITY 6b Select FAX  
6c Select SECURITY  
7
Select the Security  
Option  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
CODE  
NUMBER  
FAX NBR  
Select “4.SECURITY FAX NBR”  
by pressing:  
Use the Dial Keypad to select  
one of the following options or  
MENU  
Select “2.SECURITY CODE” by Select “3.FAX NUMBER” by  
pressing: pressing:  
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document.  
use  
/
to scroll  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR =  
140  
up/down the menu and press  
.
SECURITY CODE  
SECURE FAX  
[
SECURITY CODE  
[
]
]
[
]
When the document scanning  
is complete, the display returns  
to the Standby Mode.  
1. NO  
Enter a 4-digit Security Code  
(0000 to 9999) using the Dial  
Keypad.  
Enter a 4-digit Security Code  
(0000 to 9999) using the Dial  
Keypad. Each digit of the en-  
tered code is displayed as an  
asterisk.  
Enter the number of the polling  
(remote) facsimile using the  
Dial Keypad (max. 20 digits).  
Select this option if you do  
not want to use security.  
Go to Step 7.  
NOTE:  
In the Direct Transmission  
mode, a document is not  
stored in the memory. It will  
await a polling request in  
the Automatic Document  
Feeder.  
2. SECURITY CODE  
Select this option to use a  
4-digit Security Code with  
TOSHIBA facsimiles only.  
Go to Step 6a.  
SECURE FAX  
[123456789  
SECURITY CODE  
[****]  
]
SECURITY CODE  
[****]  
Then press:  
Then press:  
3. FAX NUMBER  
Then press:  
Select this option to use the  
polling (remote) facsimile’s  
telephone number as the  
security code. Go to Step  
6b.  
Go to Step 7.  
SECURE FAX  
NOTE:  
[
]
Go to Step 7.  
This number must be pro-  
grammed in the terminal ID  
of the remote facsimile. If  
no number or an unmatched  
number is in the terminal ID,  
a polling error will occur.  
Enter the number of the polling-  
receiver’s facsimile (max. 20  
digits).  
NOTE:  
4. SECURITY FAX NBR  
Select this option to use  
both a 4-digit security code  
and a facsimile number. Go  
to Step 6c.  
You must provide this 4-  
digit number to the remote  
party in advance or they will  
not be able to retrieve this  
document. If no code or an  
incorrect code is used, a  
polling error will occur.  
SECURE FAX  
[123456789  
]
When the number is displayed  
correctly, press:  
Go to Step 7.  
117  
Simple & Security Polling Reservation - continued  
Complete the  
Procedure - continued  
7
NOTE:  
If a Simple Polling operation  
is already reserved, the fol-  
lowing screen is displayed.  
ALREADYASSIGNED  
1.DELETE  
2.ADD +  
3.RETAIN  
You may select one of the fol-  
lowing three options.  
1. DELETE  
Select this option to replace  
the previous reservation.  
2. ADD +  
Select this option to add  
this document to the exist-  
ing reservation.  
3. RETAIN  
Select this option to retain  
the existing reservation.  
118  
Multi Mailbox Polling Reservation  
Multi Mailbox is a feature used  
Display the  
Load the Document  
Select MULTI POLL  
BOX  
Select POLLING  
RESERVE  
to store a document in memory  
so that multiple remote parties  
may poll to receive it at any  
time. No Security Codes are  
used with this feature. The  
document is retained in memo-  
ry regardless of how many  
times it is polled.  
1
2
4
3
POLLING RESERVE  
Menu  
Press:  
Select “2.MULTI POLL BOX”  
by pressing:  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select “02.POLLING RESERVE”  
by pressing:  
MENU  
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
NOTES:  
+
•
Only one Multi Mailbox  
polling reservation can  
be set at one time.  
•
When a Simple Polling  
reservation is reserved,  
Multi Mailbox reservation  
is not available.  
POLLING  
01.POLLING  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
POLLINGRESERVE  
1.POLL ONCE BOX  
02.POLLINGRESERVE  
2.MULTI POLL BOX  
•
Even in the Direct Trans-  
mission mode, a docu-  
ment is scanned and  
stored in the memory.  
119  
Multi Mailbox Polling Reservation - continued  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document.  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR =  
140  
When the document scanning  
is complete, the display returns  
to the Standby Mode.  
NOTE:  
If a Multi Mailbox operation  
is already reserved, the fol-  
lowing screen is displayed.  
ALREADYASSIGNED  
1.DELETE  
2.ADD +  
3.RETAIN  
You may select one of the fol-  
lowing three options.  
1. DELETE  
Select this option to replace  
the previous reservation.  
2. ADD +  
Select this option to add  
this document to the exist-  
ing reservation.  
3. RETAIN  
Select this option to retain  
the existing reservation.  
120  
Simple & Secure Polling  
Use this procedure to retrieve a  
document from a remote fac-  
simile.  
Display the  
POLLING Menu  
Select POLLING  
Dial the Remote  
Facsimile  
Select the Security  
Code Option  
1
2
3
4
If the remote facsimile is a  
TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4-  
digit security code is pro-  
grammed to the document to  
be polled, you must enter the  
correct 4-digit security code in  
order to retrieve the document.  
Press:  
Select “01.POLLING” by press-  
ing:  
Dial the number of the remote  
facsimile (in which the docu-  
ment you want to retrieve is  
located) using any of the follow-  
ing dialing methods.  
Select the security code op-  
tion.  
MENU  
If the remote facsimile is a  
TOSHIBA facsimile and a 4-  
digit security code is pro-  
grammed to the document to  
be polled, select “1. YES” by  
pressing:  
+
+
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
+
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
POLLING  
01.POLLING  
POLLING  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
Go to Step 5.  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
02.POLLINGRESERVE  
If the remote facsimile is not a  
TOSHIBA facsimile or a Secu-  
rity Code is not in use, select  
“2. NO” by pressing:  
Press:  
Go to Step 6.  
SECURITY CODE ?  
1.YES  
2.NO  
121  
Simple & Secure Polling - continued  
Enter the Security  
Code  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
6
Enter the 4-digit security code  
for the document to be re-  
trieved.  
The facsimile will dial the re-  
mote facsimile to retrieve the  
document. When the operation  
is complete, the following  
screen is displayed for about 2  
seconds and your documents  
will be printed.  
SECURITY CODE=  
[****]  
OPERATIONCOMPLETED  
FILE NBR =  
167  
When the 4-digit security code  
is entered, press:  
Go to Step 6.  
122  
Multi-Address Polling  
In a Multi Polling operation, the  
Display the  
POLLING Menu  
Select POLLING  
Press the MULTI  
Key  
Enter the Number of  
Remote Facsimiles  
documents are retrieved from  
multiple remote facsimiles us-  
ing pre-programmed groups,  
One Touch Keys, Abbreviated  
Dial Numbers, Alphabet Dial, or  
from the Dial Keypad.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select “01.POLLING” by press-  
ing:  
Press:  
Enter the number of the re-  
mote facsimiles using any  
combination of the following  
dialing methods.  
MENU  
MULTI  
CHARGE CODE  
NOTE:  
+
+
The result of Multi-Polling  
can be confirmed with the  
Multi-Polling Report. (See  
page 191.)  
•
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
+
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
POLLING  
01.POLLING  
POLLING  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
MULTI POLLING  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
02.POLLINGRESERVE  
Group Dialing  
... See page 108  
After each entry, the selected  
facsimile is displayed for 2  
seconds.  
ABB. NUMBER=  
009  
GREENSVILLEPLANT  
Repeat this procedure until all  
remote facsimiles are entered.  
ENTER MORE OR  
PRESS [START]  
123  
Multi-Address Polling - continued  
Select the Security  
Code Option  
Enter the Security  
Code  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
6
7
When all the remote facsimile  
locations have been entered in  
Step 4, press:  
Enter the 4-digit security code  
for the document to be re-  
trieved.  
The facsimile will dial the re-  
mote facsimiles to retrieve the  
documents. When the opera-  
tion is complete, the following  
screen is displayed for about 2  
seconds and your documents  
will be printed.  
SECURITY CODE ?  
1.YES  
OPERATIONCOMPLETED  
2.NO  
FILE NBR =  
167  
If all of the remote facsimiles  
are TOSHIBA facsimiles and  
the same 4-digit security code  
is programmed for all of the  
documents to be polled, select  
“1. YES” by pressing:  
SECURITY CODE=  
[****]  
When the 4-digit security code  
is entered, press:  
Go to Step 6.  
If all or some the remote fac-  
similes are not a TOSHIBA  
facsimile or no Security Codes  
are being used, select “2. NO”  
by pressing:  
Go to Step 7.  
124  
- MAILBOX (ITU-T Compatible)  
This section describes the pro-  
cedures to setup a Mailbox in  
the e-STUDIO170F hub unit.  
Setting Up a Mailbox  
Using this function, all ITU-T F-  
code compliant facsimiles can  
reserve, transmit, or retrieve  
documents to and from the e-  
STUDIO170F. Mailboxes must  
be setup prior to utilizing the e-  
STUDIO170F as a Mailbox  
Hub. A maximum of 50 ITU-T  
F-code mailboxes may be es-  
tablished in this unit. For more  
information, see page 115. Two  
Types of Mailboxes are avail-  
able.  
Display the MAILBOX  
Menu  
Select SETUP &  
DELETE  
Select MAILBOX  
SETUP  
Select the Mailbox  
Type  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select “04.SETUP & DELETE”  
by pressing:  
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
Select “1.MAILBOX SETUP”  
by pressing:  
MENU  
To select Confidential Box,  
press:  
+
+
+
To select Bulletin Board Box,  
press:  
•
Confidential Box  
Confidential box allows a  
one time document retrieval  
from the mailbox. Once a  
document is retrieved, it is  
cleared. A document retriev-  
al password for accessing  
the Confidential Box must  
be added during setup.  
It is important to note that a  
password is required to re-  
trieve a document from a  
Confidential mailbox. The  
party retrieving the contents  
of this mailbox must use the  
correct password.  
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
SETUP & DELETE  
1.MAILBOXSETUP  
MAILBOX TYPE  
1.CONFIDENTIALTYPE  
BOX NUMBER  
[
]
02.BULLETINBOARD  
03.RELAYREQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
2.MAILBOXDELETE  
3.DONE  
2.BULLETINBOARD  
•
Bulletin Board Box  
Bulletin Board box allows  
multiple document retrievals  
from the mailbox. It is pos-  
sible to add a password re-  
quirement for document res-  
ervation so that only users  
with the correct password  
can reserve documents.  
The password is not re-  
quired to retrieve docu-  
ments from the Bulletin  
Board Box.  
125  
Setting Up a Mailbox - continued  
Enter the Box  
Number  
Select the Password  
Option  
Enter the Password  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
6
7
8
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
Enter the Mailbox number  
(max. 20 digits).  
Select whether or not to use  
the password option for this  
mailbox.  
Enter the password (max. 20  
digits).  
To set the password option for  
this mailbox, press:  
STOP  
Go to Step 7.  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
If you do not wish to set the  
password option with this mail-  
box, press:  
Then press:  
PASSWORD  
[*****  
]
Go to Step 8.  
SETUP PASSWORD  
1.YES  
Then press:  
2.NO  
NOTES:  
•
If you selected the Confi-  
dential Box in Step 4, a  
password must be used if  
the document is to be re-  
trieved. The remote fac-  
simile will require its opera-  
tor to enter this password  
before being able to retrieve  
the document.  
NOTE:  
COMPLETED  
Up to 50 Confidential and  
Bulletin Board mailboxes  
can be created.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Return to Step 3.  
•
If you selected the Bulletin  
Board Box in Step 4, as-  
signing a password will re-  
quire a password to be en-  
tered before any documents  
can be reserved into the  
Bulletin Board Box.  
126  
Deleting a Mailbox  
This section describes the pro-  
cedures to delete an existing  
Mailbox in a e-STUDIO170F  
hub unit.  
Display the MAILBOX  
Menu  
Select SETUP &  
DELETE  
Select MAILBOX  
DELETE  
Enter the Box  
Number  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select “04.SETUP & DELETE”  
by pressing:  
Enter the Box number (max.  
20 digits) of the Mailbox you  
want to delete.  
Select “2.MAILBOX DELETE”  
by pressing:  
NOTE:  
MENU  
If a document exists in the  
Mailbox you want to delete,  
this operation is not allowed  
until the document is re-  
trieved, printed, or cancelled  
from the Mailbox.  
+
+
+
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
SETUP & DELETE  
1.MAILBOXSETUP  
BOX NUMBER  
[
]
Then press:  
02.BULLETINBOARD  
03.RELAYREQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
2.MAILBOXDELETE  
3.DONE  
If the entered Box number  
does not have a password pro-  
grammed, go to Step 6.  
If the entered Box number has  
a password programmed, the  
screen below is displayed.  
Go to Step 5.  
PASSWORD  
[
]
127  
Deleting a Mailbox - continued  
Enter the Password  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
6
Enter the Password (max. 20).  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
STOP  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
PASSWORD  
[*****  
]
Then press:  
DELETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Return to Step 2.  
NOTE:  
Make sure that the correct  
password is entered. Other-  
wise, the machine will in-  
form you that the password  
is incorrect.  
128  
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub)  
This section describes the pro-  
Load the Document  
Display the MAILBOX  
Menu  
Select the Mailbox Type  
cedures to send a document to  
a remote hub unit’s Confiden-  
tial Box, or reserve a document  
to a Bulletin Board Box in a re-  
mote hub unit. The remote hub  
unit must be compliant with  
ITU-T F-code communications.  
For more information, see page  
115.  
1
2
3
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
To reserve the document to a  
Bulletin Board Box, press:  
MENU  
To send the document to a  
Confidential Box, press:  
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
+
+
NOTE:  
The destination mailbox  
number must be setup in  
the remote hub unit prior to  
sending document.  
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
BULLETIN BOARD  
1.PRINTMAILBOX  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
CONFIDENTIAL  
1.PRINTMAILBOX  
02.BULLETINBOARD  
03.RELAYREQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETECONTENTS  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETECONTENTS  
129  
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub) - continued  
Select SEND TO  
MAILBOX  
Enter the Box  
Number  
Enter the Password  
for Reservation  
Dial the Remote Hub  
Unit  
Complete the  
Procedure  
4
5
6
7
8
Enter the Box Number (max.  
20 digits).  
Enter the password to access  
the Bulletin Board Box.  
Enter the facsimile number of  
the remote hub unit using any  
of the following dialing meth-  
ods.  
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document into memory.  
The following screen is dis-  
played for about 2 seconds be-  
fore returning to the Standby  
Mode.  
Select “2. SEND TO MAIL-  
BOX” by pressing:  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
BOX NUMBER  
FILE NBR =  
231  
[
]
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
NOTE:  
Then press:  
Then press:  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
If a document is not set, the  
following screen will be dis-  
played. The menu will return  
to the Standby Mode in  
about 60 seconds if no  
documents are set.  
Then press:  
If you are sending to a Confi-  
dential Box, go to Step 7.  
SEND(BULLETINBOARD)  
ENTER FAX NUMBER  
TELNUMBER=(MAX128)  
[123  
SEND(CONFIDENTIAL)  
ENTER FAX NUMBER  
]
LOAD DOCUMENT  
If you are sending to a Bulletin  
Board, go to Step 6.  
PASSWORD  
[
]
130  
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub)  
This section describes the pro-  
Load the Document  
Display the MAILBOX  
Menu  
Select the Mailbox Type  
cedure to reserve a document  
to the e-STUDIO170F’s Confi-  
dential Box or Bulletin Board  
Box.  
1
2
3
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
To reserve the document to a  
Bulletin Board Box, press:  
MENU  
NOTES:  
•
Before a document can  
be reserved to a mail-  
box; that mailbox must  
first be setup. See page  
125.  
To reserve the document to a  
Confidential Box, press:  
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
+
+
•
If a document using in  
the Mailbox you want to  
reserve, this operation is  
not allowed.  
BULLETIN BOARD  
1.PRINTMAILBOX  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
CONFIDENTIAL  
1.PRINTMAILBOX  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETECONTENTS  
02.BULLETINBOARD  
03.RELAYREQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETECONTENTS  
131  
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub) - continued  
Select STORE TO  
MAILBOX  
Enter the Box  
Number  
Enter the Password  
for Reservation  
Complete the  
Procedure  
4
5
6
7
Select “4.STORE TO MAIL-  
BOX” by pressing:  
Enter the Box Number (max.  
20 digits).  
Enter the password to access  
the Bulletin Board Box.  
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document into memory.  
The following screen is dis-  
played for about 2 seconds be-  
fore returning to the Standby  
Mode.  
BOX NUMBER  
[
]
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NBR =  
231  
Then press:  
NOTE:  
PASSWORD  
If a document is not set, the  
following screen will be dis-  
played. The menu will return  
to the Standby Mode in  
about 60 seconds if no  
documents are set.  
[****  
]
If you are reserving to a Confi-  
dential Box, go to Step 7.  
Then press:  
If you are reserving to a Bulle-  
tin Board Box, go to Step 6.  
LOAD DOCUMENT  
PASSWORD  
[
]
132  
Retrieving (Polling) a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub)  
This section describes the pro-  
Display the  
MAILBOX Menu  
Select the Mailbox Type  
Select POLL FROM  
MAILBOX  
cedure to retrieve a document  
from a Confidential Box or Bul-  
letin Board Box in a remote  
hub unit.  
1
2
3
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
Select “3.POLL FROM MAIL-  
BOX” by pressing:  
Press:  
To retrieve a document in a  
Bulletin Board Box, press:  
MENU  
To retrieve a document in a  
Confidential Box, press:  
+
+
+
+
BOX NUMBER  
[
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
CONFIDENTIAL  
1.PRINTMAILBOX  
BULLETIN BOARD  
1.PRINTMAILBOX  
]
02.BULLETINBOARD  
03.RELAYREQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETECONTENTS  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETECONTENTS  
133  
Retrieving a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub) - continued  
Enter the Password  
Dial the Remote Hub  
Unit  
Complete the  
Procedure  
Enter the Box  
Number  
5
6
7
4
The facsimile starts dialing the  
remote hub unit to retrieve the  
document. The following screen  
is displayed for about 2 sec-  
onds before returning to the  
Standby Mode.  
Enter the Box Number (max.  
20 digits).  
Enter the password to access  
the Confidential Box.  
Enter the facsimile number of  
the remote hub unit using any  
of the following dialing meth-  
ods.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 90  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 91  
OPERATIONCOMPLETED  
FILE NBR =  
234  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 92  
Then press:  
Then press:  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 93  
NOTE:  
If a document is not set, the  
following screen will be dis-  
played. The menu will return  
to the Standby Mode in  
about 60 seconds if no  
documents are set.  
TELNUMBER=(MAX128)  
If you are retrieving from a  
Confidential Box, go to Step 5.  
[123  
]
POLL(CONFIDENTIAL)  
ENTER FAX NUMBER  
Then press:  
PASSWORD  
[
]
LOAD DOCUMENT  
If you are retrieving from a Bul-  
letin Board Box, go to Step 6.  
POLL(BULLETINBOARD)  
ENTER FAX NUMBER  
134  
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub)  
This section describes the pro-  
Display the  
MAILBOX Menu  
Select the Mailbox Type  
Select PRINT  
MAILBOX  
cedure to retrieve a document  
from a local e-STUDIO170F’s  
Confidential Box or Bulletin  
Board Box. For more informa-  
tion, see page 125.  
1
2
3
To print the contents of a Bul-  
letin Board Box, press:  
Select “1.PRINT MAILBOX” by  
pressing:  
Press:  
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
MENU  
To print the contents of a Con-  
fidential Box, press:  
+
+
+
+
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
CONFIDENTIAL  
1.PRINTMAILBOX  
BULLETIN BOARD  
1.PRINTMAILBOX  
BOX NUMBER  
[
]
02.BULLETINBOARD  
03.RELAYREQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETECONTENTS  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETECONTENTS  
135  
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub) - continued  
Enter the Box  
Number  
Enter the Password  
Complete the  
Procedure  
4
5
6
Enter the Box Number (max.  
20 digits).  
Enter the password to access  
the Confidential Box.  
The facsimile starts printing the  
document. The following screen  
is displayed during the printing  
sequence before returning to  
the Standby Mode.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 80%  
PRINTING  
Then press:  
Then press:  
If you are printing from a Confi-  
dential Box, go to Step 5.  
PASSWORD  
[
]
If you are printing from a Bulle-  
tin Board Box, go to Step 6.  
NOTE:  
If there is no document in  
the mailbox, the following is  
displayed for about 2 sec-  
onds.  
NO ENTRY  
136  
Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox (Local Hub)  
This section describes the pro-  
cedure to cancel the docu-  
ments stored in the e-  
Display the  
MAILBOX Menu  
Select the Mailbox Type  
Select CANCEL  
MAILBOX  
1
2
3
STUDIO170F. This operation  
will erase all existing docu-  
ments in each Mailbox, but not  
erase the Mailbox itself.  
Select the desired type of Mail-  
box.  
Press:  
To delete the contents of a  
Bulletin Board Box, press:  
Select “5.DELETE CON-  
TENTS” by pressing:  
MENU  
To delete the contents of a  
Confidential Box, press:  
+
+
+
+
ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
CONFIDENTIAL  
1.PRINTMAILBOX  
BULLETIN BOARD  
1.PRINTMAILBOX  
BOX NUMBER  
[
]
02.BULLETINBOARD  
03.RELAYREQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETECONTENTS  
2.SEND TO MAILBOX  
3.POLL FROM MAILBOX  
4.STORE TO MAILBOX  
5.DELETECONTENTS  
137  
Cancelling Documents in a Mailbox (Local Hub) - continued  
Enter the Box  
Number  
Enter the Password  
Complete the  
Procedure  
4
5
6
Enter the Box Number (max.  
20 digits).  
Enter the password to access  
Confidential Box.  
The facsimile will display the  
following screen for approxi-  
mately 2 seconds before re-  
turning to the Standby Mode.  
DELETED  
Then press:  
PASSWORD  
[*****  
]
If you are cancelling the con-  
tents of a Box with a password  
assigned, go to Step 5.  
Then press:  
If you are cancelling the con-  
tents of a Box with no pass-  
word assigned, go to Step 6.  
NOTE:  
If the specified data in the  
mailbox are in the commu-  
nication process, they can-  
not be cancelled.  
138  
- ADVANCED TRANSMISSION FUNCTIONS  
Department Code Access  
This procedure assumes that  
DEPT CODE  
Standby Menu  
Enter the  
Department Code  
Complete the  
Procedure  
you have selected and config-  
ured Department Codes on  
pages 52, 53 and 54 of this  
manual.  
1
2
3
The Department Code Standby  
menu is shown below.  
Enter the 5-digit Department  
Code preset for your depart-  
ment.  
If the password you have en-  
tered is valid, the ordinary  
Standby Mode screen (as  
shown below) will be displayed.  
Access will be limited to one  
transmission job or one Opera-  
tion Panel function (printing a  
list, accessing a Mailbox, etc.)  
Once selected, the use of the  
facsimile is limited to autho-  
rized personnel only.  
NOTE:  
The usage for each depart-  
ment is recorded on the De-  
partment Control List (see  
page 195).  
If the password does not  
match, verify your password  
and re-enter.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 80%  
ENTER DEPT CODE  
ENTER DEPT CODE  
[*****]  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Then press:  
NOTES:  
• Upon entering a valid 5-  
digit password, the  
standby prompt will remain  
on the LCD for one opera-  
tion or one minute which-  
ever occurs first.  
NOTE:  
If you do not have a valid  
Department Code Password,  
you cannot access this fac-  
simile.  
Contact the key operator or  
supervisor for more informa-  
tion.  
• If no keys are pressed for  
about 60 seconds during  
the above Standby Mode,  
the screen will return to  
DEPT CODE Standby  
Menu.  
139  
Account Code Entry  
This procedure assumes that  
you have enabled the Account  
Code option on page 56 of this  
manual.  
Load the Document  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
Enter an Account  
Code  
Complete the  
Procedure  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods.  
Enter the 4-digit Account Code.  
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document into memory.  
When the document scanning  
is complete, the display returns  
to the Standby Mode.  
Once enabled, the facsimile  
will prompt for an Account  
Code prior to dialing the remote  
party.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
The entered Account Code will  
be printed in the Account Code  
column on the Activity Journal  
(see pages 186).  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
NOTES:  
• “Account Code” tracking is  
only possible when using  
memory communications  
(Memory Transmission,  
Polling Receptions, etc.).  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
ENTER ACCOUNT CODE  
ENTER ACCOUNT CODE  
[****]  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
[
]
FILE NBR =  
244  
• Once entered, an Account  
Code is only effective for  
that communication pro-  
cedure. It will automati-  
cally clear upon comple-  
tion of the communication,  
upon job cancellation, or  
upon a communication er-  
ror.  
Then press:  
NOTE:  
It is possible to send a  
document without entering  
an Account Code. Simply  
press  
START  
or  
.
140  
Chain Dialing  
This allows you to dial tele-  
phone/facsimile numbers that  
may require many digits with  
pauses for voice prompts or  
variations in number se-  
quences such as long distance  
access codes, or specialized  
access lines. You can combine  
sets of numbers (Abbreviated  
Dialing, Alphabet Dialing, One  
Touch Dialing, and Keypad Di-  
aling) and pauses in a  
Load the Document  
Display the CHAIN  
DIAL COMM. Menu  
Enter the Dial  
Number  
Press the START  
Key  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select the direct function ac-  
cess button on the Operation  
Panel.  
Start constructing your dialing  
sequence using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods. You  
may use them consecutively  
until your entire dialing string  
has been entered. After each  
entry sequence, the LCD  
screen displays the screen  
shown in step 2.  
When all the required entries  
are made, press:  
START  
Press:  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
CHAIN DIAL  
“Chained” dial sequence by us-  
ing the Chain Dial Key.  
The facsimile starts scanning  
the document into memory,  
displaying the screen shown  
below. When document scan-  
ning is complete, the display  
returns to the Standby Mode.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
If your operation requires paus-  
ing for voice prompts, you will  
need to insert pause signals  
between dial strings.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
CHAIN DIAL COMM.  
ENTER TEL NUMBER.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
To determine the correct  
amount of time for your paus-  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
FILE NBR =  
108  
es, you should perform the op-  
MONITOR  
eration using  
first. This  
REDIAL  
•
Pause Signal  
way you will know how many 3-  
second pauses will be required.  
PAUSE  
141  
Default Setting for Memory Transmission  
Memory Transmission allows  
Display the  
MEMORY TX Menu  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
Select the  
Transmission Mode  
your facsimile to quickly scan  
documents to memory and re-  
turn them to you. You do not  
have to wait for the transmis-  
sion to be completed. This in-  
creases productivity as others  
do not have to wait in line to  
send a facsimile.  
1
3
2
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
Press:  
Select the desired transmis-  
sion mode.  
MENU  
To set Memory Transmission  
to ON, press:  
+
Each time you send a facsimile  
with memory transmission, the  
amount of residual memory will  
be reduced.  
STOP  
+
+
+
To set Memory Transmission  
to OFF, press:  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
Additionally, each time you  
send a memory transmission, a  
communication reservation or  
File Number is assigned.  
When Memory Transmission is  
not selected, the Direct Docu-  
ment Transmission (tray) mode  
is active by default. This allows  
your facsimile to function with-  
out the use of document memo-  
ry.  
COMPLETED  
MEMORY TX  
1.ON  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
2.OFF  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
142  
Default Setting for Security Transmission  
This function allows transmis-  
sions only when the number  
Display the  
SECURITY TX Menu  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
you dial matches the number  
programmed in the remote fac-  
simile. If the numbers do not  
match, Security Transmission  
prevents your facsimile from  
sending by indicating a trans-  
mission error.  
Press:  
Select the desired option.  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
MENU  
To set Security Transmission  
to ON, press:  
+
STOP  
+
+
+
NOTE:  
To set Security Transmission  
to OFF, press:  
The remote facsimile’s Ter-  
minal ID (TTI) must be set  
with the correct phone num-  
ber. Otherwise, a transmis-  
sion error will occur.  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
COMPLETED  
NOTE:  
Telephone numbers are  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
verified by their last 5 digits.  
SECURITY TX  
2.OFF  
1.ON  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
143  
Cover Sheet Registration  
This function enables the at-  
Display the COVER  
SHEET Menu  
Enable / Disable the  
Cover Sheet  
Include an Image on  
the Cover Sheet  
Load the Image  
Document  
tachment of a cover sheet to  
the document being transmit-  
ted.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Enable or Disable the Cover  
Sheet attachment.  
To include an image (a  
scanned company logo, etc.),  
press:  
Load the image document to be  
included on the cover sheet.  
Prior to selecting this function  
for the first time, you may wish  
to prepare a Cover Sheet im-  
age (Logo) to be used on the  
cover sheet. See Step 4 of this  
procedure.  
MENU  
NOTE:  
+
In preparing a document for  
your cover sheet image,  
only a limited area of the  
sheet will be included as  
shown below. Any data out  
of the specified range will  
be disregarded.  
(for YES)  
(for ON-Enable)  
+
+
+
If Cover Sheet has already  
been registered, the menu  
screen for selecting "DELETE"  
or "RETAIN" will be displayed.  
(for OFF-Disable)  
LOAD DOCUMENT  
Effective  
Range  
5.9 in.  
When “ON” is selected, the fol-  
lowing screen is displayed.  
(
)
150mm  
Go to Step 4.  
LOAD DOCUMENT  
1.YES  
To omit an image on the cover  
sheet, press:  
COVER SHEET  
2.NO  
2.OFF  
Feed  
Direction  
1.ON  
(for NO)  
When “OFF” is selected, the  
“COMPLETED” message will  
be displayed. The facsimile re-  
turns to the Standby Mode.  
When the document is pulled  
into the appropriate position,  
the following screen is dis-  
played.  
When “NO” is selected, the  
“COMPLETED” message will  
be displayed. The facsimile re-  
turns to the Standby Mode.  
PRESS [START]  
Press:  
START  
Image Area  
When scanning is complete,  
the facsimile returns to the  
Standby Mode.  
144  
Setting Recovery Transmission  
Recovery Transmission allows  
Display the  
Select the Recovery  
Transmit Option  
Enter the STORED  
TIME  
the operator to re-transmit a  
document after failing the ini-  
tially specified number of redial  
attempts.  
1
2
3
RECOVERY  
TRANSMIT Menu  
Press:  
To turn ON Recovery Trans-  
mission, press:  
Enter the stored time length  
(01 to 24, in unit of hours).  
MENU  
If Recovery Transmission is  
set to ON, the document is  
stored in memory for a speci-  
fied length of time. You may  
retransmit the document within  
this time period without re-  
scanning the original docu-  
ment.  
+
Go to Step 3.  
+
+
+
To turn OFF Recovery Trans-  
mission, press:  
Then press:  
When “OFF” is selected, the  
“COMPLETED” message will  
be displayed. The facsimile re-  
turns to the Standby Mode.  
When completed, the following  
screen is displayed for about 2  
seconds. Press  
STOP  
to return to the Standby  
Mode.  
STORE TIME  
(1-24)  
COMPLETED  
RECOVERY TX  
2.ON  
[ 8]  
1.OFF  
145  
TTI (Transmit Terminal ID) Print  
To properly identify the sender of your documents, the e-STUDIO170F prints a transmission header (TTI) on the recording paper of the remote facsimile. The information  
included in the TTI are:  
•
Date and Start Time  
The date and start time when this document was sent to the remote facsimile.  
•
•
Transmitting Station ID Name (see page 42)  
Transmission Serial Number  
With each transmission, the e-STUDIO170F automatically assigns a unique transmission number. This number is also printed on the Activity Journals.  
•
•
Page Number/Total Number of Pages  
Each page of the document is printed with a page number followed by the total number of pages in the document (e.g. 001/003 means the first page of three total  
pages).  
File Number  
Each document sent from memory is assigned a file number. This file number is used by the e-STUDIO170F to assist you in managing multiple document jobs.  
Transmission  
Serial Number  
Total Page  
Number  
Date  
Transmission  
Station ID Name  
Page  
Number  
Start Time  
File Number  
01-31-2005 10:00 FROM: TOSHIBA  
+1-714-583-0000  
T-123 P.001/003 F-030  
You can select the following options for your TTI information.  
•
•
•
Inside  
The document is sent to the receiver with the TTI included in the document data. Accordingly, if any characters exist near the top edge of the sending data, they may  
be overlapped with the TTI.  
Outside  
The document is sent to the receiver with the TTI to be printed outside the sending data. Accordingly, if any characters exist near the top edge of the sending data, the  
TTI and the sending data will not overlap in transmission.  
Off  
IMPORTANT NOTE:  
The U.S. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) requires that anyone sending a facsimile message must identify themselves (or company), give their facsimile tele-  
phone number, and provide the date and time of the transmission. This information must be on the lead-edge of, at least, the first page of the facsimile transmission.  
146  
TTI (Transmit Terminal ID) Print - continued  
Display the TTI  
Menu  
Select the TTI Print  
Option  
1
2
Select the TTI Print option.  
To select INSIDE, press:  
Press:  
MENU  
+
+
+
+
To select OUTSIDE, press:  
To select OFF, press:  
The display shows the screen  
below to indicate that the menu  
selection is completed.  
To return to the Standy Mode,  
STOP  
press  
.
TTI  
COMPLETED  
1.INSIDE  
2.OUTSIDE  
3.OFF  
147  
Send after Scan Default Setting  
This feature enables you to de-  
Display the SEND  
AFTER SCAN Menu  
Select the Send  
After Scan Option  
Select the Memory  
Full Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
termine whether the dialing  
starts while the machine is  
scanning the documents or af-  
ter the machine has scanned  
all documents in the Memory  
Send mode.  
Also, if dialing after scanning is  
selected, you can select to de-  
lete or send the scanned pages  
when the memory becomes full  
during scanning.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select the desired Send After  
Scan Option.  
Select the desired Memory Full  
Option.  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
MENU  
+
To enable Send After Scan,  
press:  
To cancel the page being  
scanned, press:  
+
+
+
STOP  
To send the pages being  
scanned, press:  
UPON MEMORY FULL  
1.CANCELSENDING  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
2.SEND SCANNED PAGES  
Go to Step 3.  
COMPLETED  
To disable Send After Scan,  
press:  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
SEND AFTER SCAN  
2.OFF  
1.ON  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
The following is displayed for 2  
seconds.  
NOTE:  
COMPLETED  
Even if  
is selected,  
transmission will not start  
when memory full occurs at  
the first page.  
Go to Step 4.  
148  
Document Length Setting  
This setting enables or dis-  
Display the  
Select the Document  
Length Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
ables the e-STUDIO170F send-  
ing documents longer than 1  
Meter (39.4”). The default set-  
ting enables the 1 Meter (39.4”)  
limit.  
1
2
3
DOCUMENT LENGTH  
Menu  
Select the Document Length  
option.  
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for  
instructions, or press  
Press:  
MENU  
To select 1m, press:  
+
NOTE:  
If you select “Any Length”,  
the machine will be unable  
to detect a document jam.  
+
+
+
STOP  
To select ANY LENGTH,  
press:  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
DOCUMENTLENGTH  
1.1M (39 INCHES)  
COMPLETED  
2.ANY LENGTH  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
149  
PIN Mask  
Some telephone PBX (Private  
Branch Exchange) systems  
can track and monitor all out-  
going calls made by a fac-  
simile. This is done by entering  
a PIN code after dialing the  
destination facsimile number.  
Load the Document  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
Press the CHARGE  
CODE Key  
Enter the PIN  
Number  
1
2
3
4
Enter the number of the re-  
mote facsimile.  
Press the CHARGE CODE key  
to initiate the PIN number se-  
quence. A “+” will be displayed  
on the LCD display.  
Enter the PIN number.  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 83).  
The Toshiba e-STUDIO170F  
facilitates the telephone PBX  
system by masking the PIN  
entered with a “$” on both the  
LCD and TX Reports/Journals.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 84  
and 85).  
MULTI  
CHARGE CODE  
NOTE:  
This feature is limited to  
keypad dialing.  
This feature is not available  
with Abbreviated, Alphabet,  
or One Touch Key dialing.  
The PIN number entered is  
masked with “$” displayed on  
the LCD display.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX 128)  
TEL NUMBER=(MAX 128)  
[17145551212  
]
[17145551212+  
]
When the entry is complete,  
START  
press  
.
TEL NUMBER=(MAX 128)  
[17145551212+$$$$]  
150  
- ADVANCED RECEPTION FUNCTIONS  
Secure Reception Access Code Setting  
There are occasions when you  
Display the SECURE  
RX Menu  
Select the SECURE  
RX Option  
Enter the Current  
Security Code  
Enter a New  
Security Code  
may wish to secure access to  
incoming documents. Secure  
RX allows you to receive docu-  
ments to memory until a secu-  
rity code is entered. This en-  
sures that only users with the  
correct security code may re-  
trieve documents. In addition,  
Secure RX can be setup to au-  
tomatically activate during a  
specified time period.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
To select a security code for  
the first time or to change an  
existing security code, press:  
Before you change the security  
code, you must enter the exist-  
ing code to gain access. Enter  
the current security code.  
Enter your new 4-digit security  
code.  
MENU  
+
+
+
+
+
To setup Secure RX, a 4-digit  
security code must be pro-  
grammed first. After program-  
ming the security code, you  
can specify the time period  
during which Secure RX will be  
active. 24-hour coverage for  
specific days of the week is  
selectable. This section de-  
scribes the procedure for pro-  
gramming a security code or  
changing an existing security  
code.  
If the security code already ex-  
ists and you wish to change  
the current code, go to Step 3.  
Then press:  
When you enter a security  
code for the first time, go to  
Step 4.  
Then press:  
If a new code needs to be en-  
tered:  
COMPLETED  
Go to Step 4.  
SECURE RX  
01.SECURITYCODE  
If the correct code is entered,  
following is displayed.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
02.SECURE RX  
NEW SECURITY CODE  
[
]
NEW SECURITY CODE  
[
]
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
If a code already exists:  
ENTER SECURITY CODE  
[
]
151  
Secure Reception Access Code Setting - continued  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
5
After completing this Configura-  
tion Setting, you may continue  
to select other settings referring  
to their associated pages for  
instructions, or press  
STOP  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
152  
Secure RX Activation Period Setting  
This section describes the pro-  
cedure to setup the e-  
Display the SECURE  
RX Menu  
Select the SECURE  
RX Option  
Enter the Security  
Code  
Activate the  
Automatic Secure RX  
1
2
3
4
STUDIO170F to automatically  
activate Secure RX during a  
specified time period. Prior to  
setting this option, you must  
have a security code set in the  
facsimile.  
Press:  
To set the activity period for  
Secure RX, press:  
Enter the current security  
code.  
To activate Secure RX, press:  
MENU  
+
+
+
+
+
NOTES:  
MONDAY  
1.ALL DAY  
• If a security code is not  
set, the e-STUDIO170F  
automatically prompts the  
security code setting. See  
the preceding section for  
details on setting the se-  
curity code.  
2.FIXED TIME  
NOTE:  
Go to Step 5.  
If a security code is not set,  
the e-STUDIO170F auto-  
matically prompts the secu-  
rity code setting. See the  
preceding section for details  
on setting the security  
code.  
To de-activate Secure RX,  
press:  
Then press:  
• Before setting Secure RX,  
be sure the Memory Re-  
ception Setting is set to  
ON.  
Then press:  
SECURE RX  
1.SECURITYCODE  
SECURITY CODE  
SECURE RX  
2.OFF  
STOP  
[
]
02.SECURE RX  
1.ON  
to return to the Standby Mode.  
153  
Secure RX Activation Period Setting - continued  
Set for Each Day  
Enter the Start and  
End Time  
Complete the  
Procedure  
5
6
7
To set Secure RX for the entire  
24-hour-period for the day dis-  
played, press:  
Enter the time period (start  
time and end time) subject to  
automatic activation using the  
following keys.  
The following is displayed for 2  
seconds.  
STOP  
Press  
to return to the  
Standby Mode.  
To move the entry  
point to the left or  
right.  
If you select “1.ALL DAY” for  
every day of the week, you will  
go to Step 7.  
COMPLETED  
To enter the  
desired nu-  
meric value  
for each time  
digit.  
To specify a time period for  
Secure Rx operation on this  
day, press:  
Repeat this step until you se-  
lect ALL DAY or FIXED TIME  
for each day of the week (up to  
Sunday).  
MENU  
To change the time-  
of-day forward or  
backward when the  
12-hour system is  
used.  
If you selected “2.FIXED  
TIME” for any day of the week,  
you will go to Step 6 after se-  
lecting the options for seven  
days of the week.  
When the start time and end  
time of the desired period is  
displayed correctly, press:  
NOTE:  
The day of the week is  
shown in the LCD. Selecting  
ALL DAY for Monday  
means Secure RX will be  
active for the entire 24  
hours of Monday.  
NOTE:  
The time period entered in  
this step will be applied to  
all the days of the week  
with the time period se-  
lected.  
START/STOPTIME  
[10:00PM-09:00AM]  
154  
Memory Reception Setting  
When the printer becomes unavailable during a document recep-  
tion, due to a recording paper jam, toner empty or other error con-  
dition, this facsimile backs up the received data by storing it in  
memory.  
Display MEMORY  
RX Menu  
Select the Memory  
Reception Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
Press:  
To set Memory Reception ON,  
press:  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
The document data is received and stored in memory. The nature  
of trouble is indicated on the LCD display with an ALARM lamp  
blinking.  
MENU  
+
JAN-31 09:43 AM 90%  
PAPER EMPTY  
STOP  
+
+
+
To set Memory Reception to  
OFF, press:  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
To retrieve the data stored in memory, simply correct the error  
condition (such as refill your paper tray with recording paper). Your  
document will be printed automatically.  
NOTES:  
•
The default setting is ON.  
•
When OFF is selected, no receptions will be possible  
should the paper supply be exhausted or a paper jam oc-  
curs.  
MEMORY RX  
1.ON  
COMPLETED  
2.OFF  
•
Note that Memory Reception will not occur when the re-  
sidual memory is zero. When the residual memory be-  
comes zero during a Memory Reception, document recep-  
tion will stop and no further receptions are possible until  
memory becomes available.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
155  
Reception-Reduction Setting  
This function allows the reduc-  
Display the SET RX  
REDUCTION Menu  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
tion of the received image, if  
the received document is larger  
than the recording paper.  
Press:  
To set RX Reduction to ON,  
press:  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
MENU  
NOTES:  
• The default setting is ON.  
+
• If the size of the received  
document exceeds the pre-  
determined dimensions:  
STOP  
+
+
+
To set RX Reduction to OFF,  
press:  
1. When RX Reduction is  
ON,  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
- The document will be  
reduced and recorded if  
it is within the predeter-  
mined reduction ratio. If  
the portion of the docu-  
ment to be discarded is  
within the predetermined  
dimensions, it will be  
discarded.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
RX REDUCTION  
1.ON  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
2. When RX Reduction is  
OFF,  
2.OFF  
- The document will be  
divided and recorded  
onto two or more sheets.  
• This setting is only avail-  
able for document recep-  
tion. It is not available for  
copying.  
• To change this predeter-  
mined dimension, contact  
your service representa-  
tive.  
156  
Reception-Discard Setting  
This function allows up to 13  
Display the  
DISCARD Menu  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
mm* of the lower portion of the  
document to be discarded, if  
the document is larger than the  
recording paper.  
1
2
3
Press:  
To set DISCARD function to  
ON, press:  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
MENU  
*
To change this predeter-  
mined dimension, contact  
your service representative.  
+
+
+
+
STOP  
To set DISCARD function to  
OFF, press:  
NOTES:  
• The default setting is ON.  
• When the portion of the  
received document to be  
discarded exceeds the  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
predetermined dimensions:  
COMPLETED  
Even if Reception-Discard  
is ON, the document will  
be divided and recorded  
onto two or more sheets if  
RX Reduction is ON (See  
page 156).  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
DISCARD  
1.ON  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
• This setting is only avail-  
able for document recep-  
tion. It is not available for  
copying.  
2.OFF  
157  
Reverse Order Printing Setting  
This function receives the en-  
tire facsimile document into  
memory and then prints the  
document in reverse order. In  
this way, the pages of the doc-  
ument will be in correct order.  
Display the  
Select the Desired  
Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
REVERSE ORDER  
PRINT Menu  
Press:  
To set REVERSE ORDER  
PRINT to ON, Press:  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
MENU  
+
NOTES:  
• The default setting is OFF.  
STOP  
+
+
+
To set REVERSE ORDER  
PRINT to OFF, press:  
• If the dimension of the  
memory is 256KB or less,  
the setting of Reverse Or-  
der Printing is invalid.  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
COMPLETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
REV. ORDER PRINT  
1.ON  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
2.OFF  
158  
Privileged Reception  
This function prevents your  
facsimile from receiving docu-  
ments from unknown parties.  
Transmissions to the e-  
Display the  
PRIVILEGED RX  
Menu  
Select the Privileged  
Reception Option  
Select Another  
SETUP Item, or ...  
1
2
3
STUDIO170F are only possible  
when the sending facsimile’s  
terminal identification or tele-  
phone number match those as-  
signed to the Abbreviated Dial  
Numbers or One Touch Dial  
Keys on your facsimile.  
Press:  
To turn ON Privileged Recep-  
tion, press:  
After completing this Configu-  
ration Setting, you may con-  
tinue to select other settings  
referring to their associated  
pages for instructions, or press  
MENU  
+
STOP  
+
+
+
To turn OFF Privileged Recep-  
tion, press:  
NOTES:  
• The default setting is OFF.  
to exit the Configuration Set-  
ting mode and return to the  
Standby Mode.  
• Privileged Reception is ef-  
fective only on incoming  
calls received in the Auto  
Receive Mode.  
• Privileged Reception is not  
available for polling or mail-  
box retrieval requests from  
the remote facsimiles.  
PRIVILEGED RX  
2.OFF  
COMPLETED  
• For this feature to work,  
you must pre-program the  
numbers of the facsimiles  
in your communication sys-  
tem into your e-  
1.ON  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
STUDIO170F’s Abbreviat-  
ed Number or One Touch  
Dial Key database. In addi-  
tion, the remote facsimile  
must have the correct tele-  
phone number programmed  
as its terminal identifica-  
tion.  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
159  
RTI (Remote Terminal ID) Print  
To clearly identify the time, date, and page count of your facsimile receptions, the e-STUDIO170F is  
able to print a Reception Footer (RTI) on received documents using the e-STUDIO170F’s internal  
clock.  
Display the RTI  
Menu  
Select the RTI Print  
Option  
1
2
Select the RTI Print option.  
To print, press:  
Press:  
MENU  
RECEIVED 01-31-2005  
Date  
10:00  
FROM-+81425887449  
TO-TOSHIBA  
PAGE 001  
+
Transmitting Station  
ID Number  
+
+
+
To not print, press:  
Footer Message  
Receiving Station ID  
Start Time  
Page  
Number  
COMPLETED  
NOTES:  
•
The Transmitting Station ID Number will only be provided if it is programmed in the remote  
facsimile’s Terminal ID.  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
•
The Receiving Station ID will only be provided if it is programmed in this facsimile’s Terminal  
ID.  
RTI  
2.OFF  
Returns to display the SETUP  
menu screen.  
1.ON  
The press:  
STOP  
to return to the Standby Mode.  
160  
Secure RX Temporary Stop  
This section describes the pro-  
cedure to manually de-activate  
Secure RX.  
Select TEMPORARY  
STOP  
Display the SECURE  
RX Menu  
ENTER the Security  
Code  
1
2
3
This function will permit you to  
temporarily de-activate Secure  
RX to printout documents re-  
tained within memory.  
Press:  
To temporarily de-activate Se-  
cure RX, press:  
Enter the 4-digit security code.  
MENU  
+
NOTES:  
• In order to manually de-  
activate Secure RX, you  
must first activate Secure  
RX. (See page 153).  
+
ENTER SECURITY CODE  
[
]
• If the Secure RX has been  
set to ON, the facsimile  
activates it automatically  
after a document, which  
has been stored in the  
memory, is output.  
NOTE:  
ENTER SECURITY CODE  
[****]  
If Secure RX Activation is  
set to OFF, an error will re-  
sult in the operation above.  
The message “SETTING IS  
OFF” will be displayed for 2  
seconds, then the screen  
returns to the Standby  
Mode.  
Then press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to con-  
firm your selection. Then the  
display returns to the Standby  
Mode.  
SECURE RX  
1.TEMPORARYSTOP  
COMPLETED  
161  
- TRANSMISSION OPTIONS  
Security Transmission  
This function prevents your  
Load the Document  
Display the  
SECURITY TX Menu  
Select the Option  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
facsimile from sending to an  
incorrectly dialed phone. With  
this function set ON, the dialed  
number will be checked against  
the remote facsimile’s pro-  
grammed Transmit Terminal ID  
(TTI). The transmission will  
only occur if the number dialed  
matches the remote party’s  
number.  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 83).  
Turn ON Security Transmis-  
sion by pressing:  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods or you  
may designate another option  
at this point.  
MENU  
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 84  
and 85).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
+
+
+
Turn OFF Security Transmis-  
sion by pressing:  
You can turn the SECURITY  
TX ON for a single transmis-  
sion using this procedure.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
NOTES:  
• To change the default set-  
ting of this function, refer  
to page 143. The status  
selection in this operation  
will take precedence over  
the default setting.  
The following screen is dis-  
played. You may dial the re-  
mote facsimile for your com-  
munication job. The display will  
return to the Standby Mode in  
about 60 seconds if no keys  
are pressed.  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
• The facsimile will auto-  
matically return to its de-  
fault status immediately  
after that transmission is  
complete.  
SECURITY TX  
2.OFF  
1.ON  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
162  
Disabling ECM Temporarily  
If the ECM default setting is  
Select the ECM  
Option  
Display the SET  
ECM Menu  
set to ON, it is always effec-  
tive for communications on  
your facsimile (see page 59).  
2
1
Press:  
Select “2.OFF” by pressing:  
You can turn the ECM OFF for  
a single transmission using  
this procedure. The facsimile  
will automatically return to its  
default status immediately af-  
ter that transmission is com-  
plete.  
MENU  
+
+
+
+
The following screen is dis-  
played. You may dial the re-  
mote facsimile for your com-  
munication job. The display will  
return to the Standby Mode in  
about 60 seconds if no keys  
are pressed.  
NOTES:  
• If ECM is set to “OFF” in  
the default setting proce-  
dure, this procedure is not  
applicable and the fac-  
simile will warn you with  
an error message, “NOT  
ALLOWED NOW.”  
• You can change the set-  
ting even when a docu-  
ment is not set on the  
Document Support. The  
setting becomes invalid if  
no keys are pressed for  
about 60 seconds.  
ECM  
1.ON  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
2.OFF  
163  
Dialing with Sub-Address  
This function attaches a sub-  
Display the SUB  
ADDRESS COMM  
Menu  
Load the Document  
Select the Option  
Enter the SUB  
Address  
address to the standard desti-  
nation address in the event the  
remote party requires one.  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
Select one of the following op-  
tions from the menu.  
Enter the required SUB address  
(max. 20 digits), then press:  
Three types of sub-addresses  
can be used (SUB, SEP, and  
PWD); or any combination of  
two or three types can be  
used. After selecting the de-  
sired types, the transmission  
to follow will be sent to the de-  
sired address using the desig-  
nated sub-address.  
MENU  
To select SUB, press:  
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
+
+
Go to Step 4.  
The display returns to the  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
screen at the bottom of Step 2.  
You may continue from Step 3  
and enter another sub-address  
of a different type. To complete  
your sub-address entry, select  
option “1.DONE” in Step 3.  
To select SEP, press:  
You can activate this option  
while programming an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number (page 65) or  
One Touch Dial Key (page 71)  
if communication with a certain  
remote party always requires  
this option.  
Go to Step 5.  
To select PWD, press:  
If you activate this option using  
both an Abbreviated Dial Num-  
ber (or One Touch Dial Key)  
setting and using this proce-  
dure for the same destination,  
this operation will take prece-  
dence over the pre-pro-  
SUB ADDRESS COMM.  
1.DONE  
2.SUBADDRESSSUB  
3.SUBADDRESSSEP  
4.SUBADDRESSPWD  
Go to Step 6.  
To complete this procedure,  
press:  
grammed setting in the Abbre-  
viated Dial or One Touch Dial.  
NOTE:  
Go to Step 7.  
For more information on  
when to use SUB/SEP/  
PWD, refer to page 69. If  
you designate an erroneous  
or unnecessary sub-ad-  
dress, the communication  
will result in an error.  
164  
Dialing with Sub-Address - continued  
Enter the SEP  
Address  
Enter the PWD  
Complete the  
Sub-Address Entry  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
5
6
7
8
Enter the required SEP ad-  
dress (max. 20 digits), then  
press:  
When the sub-address data  
has been entered, the following  
is displayed.  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods or you  
may designate another option  
at this point.  
Enter the required PWD (max.  
20 digits), then press:  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
The display returns to the  
The display returns to the  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
screen at the bottom of Step 2.  
You may continue from Step 3  
and enter another sub-address  
of a different type. To complete  
your sub-address entry, select  
option “1.DONE” in step 3.  
screen at the bottom of Step 2.  
You may continue from Step 3  
and enter another sub-address  
of a different type. To complete  
your sub-address entry, select  
option “1.DONE” in Step 3.  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
NOTE:  
When all the Sub-Ad-  
dresses are set:  
If the document is loaded in  
the Document Support,  
transmission starts with a  
combination of SUB and  
PWD.  
If the document is not  
loaded in the Document  
Support, transmission starts  
with a combination of SEP  
and PWD.  
165  
Enabling or Disabling Send after Scan Temporarily  
If the Send After Scan Mode  
Load the Document  
Display the SEND  
AFTER SCAN Menu  
Select the Send  
After Scan Option  
Select the Memory  
Full Option  
Default Setting is set to “OFF”,  
this feature allows you enable  
the Send After Scan mode for  
a single transmission. Once  
that transmission is complete,  
the default status is regained.  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select the desired Send After  
Scan Option.  
Press:  
Select the desired Memory Full  
Option.  
MENU  
To enable Send After Scan,  
press:  
+
To cancel the pages that have  
been scanned, press:  
If you enable Send after Scan,  
you will be given the opportuni-  
ty to select “SEND SCANNED  
PAGES” or “CANCEL SEND-  
ING.”  
Select “SEND SCANNED  
PAGES” if you want the pages  
scanned to memory (prior to  
the Memory Full) to be trans-  
mitted.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
+
+
+
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
To send the pages that have  
been scanned, press:  
UPON MEMORY FULL  
2.SEND SCANNED PAGES  
1.CANCELSENDING  
Select “CANCEL SENDING” if  
you want to cancel that trans-  
mission and try again later  
when more memory is avail-  
able or use a Direct TX opera-  
tion.  
Go to Step 4.  
The following screen is dis-  
played. You may dial the re-  
mote facsimile for your com-  
munication job. The display will  
return to the Standby Mode in  
about 60 seconds if no keys  
are pressed.  
To disable Send After Scan,  
press:  
SEND AFTER SCAN  
1.ON  
NOTES:  
2.OFF  
• To change the default set-  
ting of this function, refer  
to page 148. The status  
selection in this operation  
will take precedence over  
the default setting.  
The following is displayed for 2  
seconds.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
COMPLETED  
Go to Step 5.  
166  
Enabling or Disabling Send after Scan Temporarily - continued  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
5
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods.  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
167  
Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet  
This function attaches a cover  
Load the Document  
Display the COVER  
SHEET Menu  
Select the Option  
Enter the Remote  
Party’s Name  
sheet to the document to be  
transmitted or prints the cover  
sheet for confirmation purpos-  
es.  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
To attach a cover sheet, press:  
Enter the name of the remote  
party.  
Prior to using this cover sheet  
feature, the Cover Sheet func-  
tion must be set to ON. For  
more information see page  
144.  
MENU  
See page 36 for more informa-  
tion on Character Entry.  
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
Then press:  
+
+
+
COVER SHEET  
ENTER TO NAME  
NOTES:  
• When sending multi-address  
transmissions, the cover  
sheet will be attached to the  
document for every address.  
Go to Step 4.  
COVER SHEET  
ENTER FROM NAME  
• TTI will not be printed on the  
cover sheet.  
To print a cover sheet, press:  
• Smart Batch is not available  
if this function is used.  
NOTE:  
• When re-sending a docu-  
ment due to an error, the  
cover sheet is again at-  
tached to the retransmis-  
sion.  
To skip the Remote Party’s  
Name, press the  
STOP  
When the printing is complete,  
the display return to the  
Standby Mode.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 99%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
COVER SHEET  
1.SEND  
or  
to go to the next step.  
2.PRINT  
• In Transmission Reports and  
Journals, the number of  
pages of each transmission  
does not includes the cover  
sheet.  
• When a Transmission Report  
is issued with the document  
image output, the first page  
data of the facsimile will be  
printed but not the cover  
page data.  
• The cover sheet is always  
sent in Letter size.  
• The resolution for the cover  
sheet is fixed to FINE. How-  
ever, if the receiving unit is  
set to STD, the cover sheet  
is sent in STD.  
168  
Attaching or Printing Cover Sheet - continued  
Enter the Sender’s  
Name  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
5
6
Cover Sheet Format  
Enter your name.  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods.  
Your Station ID (if preset; max. 40 characters)  
See page 36 for more informa-  
tion on Character Entry.  
Remote Station ID (printed when preset to the Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number or One Touch Dial Key used for dial-  
ing). Max. 20 characters  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Then press:  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
FACSIMILEMESSAGE  
JAN-31-2005  
Cover Page Title (fixed)  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Date this document was  
reserved  
Subtitle printed for  
retransmission only  
*** RE-TRANSMISSION ***  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 99%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
TO  
: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
(ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR)  
Remote Name which was  
entered using this operation  
FAXNUMBER : 12345678901234567890123456789012345678  
Dialed Facsimile Number  
(first 38 digits)  
NOTE:  
To skip the Sender’s Name,  
FROM  
: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
(ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR)  
Your Name which was entered  
using this operation  
press the  
STOP  
FAXNUMBER : 12345678901234567890  
Your Facsimile Number  
(max. 20 digits)  
or  
to go to the next step.  
TOTAL PAGE  
(WITHOUT THIS PAGE)  
001  
Number of document pages to  
be transmitted  
- Image Data Area -  
(Theimageheremaybeyourcompanylogo,etc. Itcanbepresetbyscanning,  
using the Cover Sheet Function setting operation on page 151. If no image  
is scanned for this purpose, this area is left blank.)  
169  
Delayed Communication (Time Designation)  
This function is available to  
reserve a document for trans-  
mission at a programmed  
time.  
Display the  
DELAYED COMM.  
Menu  
Load the Document  
Enter the Time and  
Date  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
Enter the time and day-of-  
month to start the communica-  
tion.  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods.  
This function is convenient for  
making use of non-peak dis-  
count telephone rates for do-  
mestic and overseas facsimile  
transmissions. Delayed com-  
munication can be applied to  
Single Transmissions (to  
transmit a single document to  
a specified destination), Multi-  
address (Group) Transmis-  
sions, Mail Box Transmis-  
sions, Relay Transmissions,  
and Polling Communications.  
MENU  
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
+
+
+
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
(The cursor moves to the next  
right digit as a numeric value is  
entered on each digit. Use the  
NOTES:  
• If the day-of-month value  
You can activate this option  
while programming an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number (page 65) or  
One Touch Dial key setting  
(page 71) if communication  
with the remote party always  
requires this option. Other-  
wise, use the following proce-  
dure.  
entered in Step 2 does not  
exist in the current month,  
the communication will  
start on the first day of the  
next month. For example,  
if “30” is entered in Febru-  
ary, the communication  
will start on March 1st.  
key to backspace and  
DELAYED COMM.  
[HH:MMAM DD]  
delete the values of digits al-  
ready entered.)  
Change the AM/PM designa-  
tion by pressing the following  
keys. (for 12-hour format)  
NOTE:  
It is not necessary to input  
a day-of-month, if you wish  
the communication to be  
completed within the next  
24-hour period.  
MENU  
• If a time in the past is pro-  
grammed, communication  
will be performed in the  
next month of the time.  
or  
Simply leave the day-of-  
month area blank.  
When the correct time and date  
is entered, press:  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
170  
Priority Transmission  
Priority Transmission permits  
you to execute a transmission  
before any other reserved  
transmission job.  
Load the Document  
Display the  
PRIORITY TX Menu  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
1
2
3
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods.  
MENU  
NOTES:  
• Priority reservation is good  
for a Single Transmission  
only.  
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
• Only one communication  
can be reserved as a Pri-  
ority Transmission.  
When a transmission is  
already reserved as a Pri-  
ority Transmission, an er-  
ror tone and “NOT AL-  
LOWED NOW” LCD  
+
+
+
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
NOTE:  
If a communication re-  
prompt result when Priority  
Transmission is selected.  
served as a Priority Trans-  
mission fails, the document  
will be priority transmitted  
after the Redial Interval  
(See page 61).  
• Priority Transmission is  
invalid during Polling and  
Mailbox communication.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
PRIORITY  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
SCANNING DOC. P001  
FILE NUMBER =  
110  
171  
Sending Recovery Transmission  
This operation is used to re-  
Display the  
Select the Desired  
Job  
Change the  
Facsimile Number  
Cancel the  
Document  
send a document after the doc-  
ument initially failed to be sent.  
If recovery transmission is set  
to ON, the document is stored  
in the e-STUDIO170F for re-  
sending.  
1
2
3
4
RECOVERY  
TRANSMIT Menu  
When the sending document to  
be recovered was sent using  
the One Touch key, Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number, Group Num-  
ber, or Alphabet Dialing, press:  
Press:  
Enter the new facsimile num-  
ber.  
Press:  
MENU  
JOB CANCEL  
+
NOTES:  
DELETE JOB NUMBER005  
1.YES  
• When the Recovery Trans-  
mission is set to OFF, an  
error tone and “NOT AL-  
LOWED NOW” LCD  
prompt result when Recov-  
ery Transmission is se-  
lected.  
If there is no document  
stored for recovery trans-  
mission, an error tone  
sounds and “NO ENTRY”  
LCD prompt will be dis-  
played.  
+
+
+
2.NO  
You can also change the num-  
ber of the remote facsimile if  
dialed from the Dial Keypad.  
To re-transmit the document or  
change the facsimile number,  
If the correct number is en-  
tered, press:  
press  
.
MENU  
JOB NUMBER  
1.START  
005  
The transmission starts imme-  
diately if the phone line is  
available.  
Press  
or  
to  
• To change the default set-  
ting of this function, refer  
to page 145. The status  
selection in this operation  
will take precedence over  
the default setting.  
view the jobs stored for resend-  
ing. The information is dis-  
played on the LCD display.  
2.CHANGE  
To start the transmission,  
press:  
RECOVERY TX  
[ENTER]:START  
The transmission starts imme-  
diately if the phone line is  
available.  
FILE NBR =  
12345  
005  
To change the number, press:  
To cancel the document, go to  
Step 4.  
FAX NUMBER (MAX128)  
[12345  
]
172  
Sending Recovery Transmission - continued  
Select the Cancel  
Option  
5
To delete the selected docu-  
ment stored for resending,  
press:  
DELETED  
Displayed for 2 seconds  
To retain the selected docu-  
ment stored for resending,  
press:  
Returns to display the Standby  
Mode screen.  
173  
Low Speed Transmission  
If communication errors fre-  
Load the Document  
Display the FAX  
SPEED Menu  
Select a Speed  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
quently occur while transmit-  
ting documents due to bad line  
conditions, we recommend you  
select a lower transmission  
speed to enable quality trans-  
missions. The transmission  
speed will be restored to the  
default value automatically af-  
ter the low speed transmission  
is completed.  
1
2
3
4
Select the desired speed.  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Press:  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods or you  
may designate another option  
at this point.  
MENU  
To select FASTEST POS-  
SIBLE, press:  
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
+
+
+
You can activate this option  
while programming an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number (page 65) or  
One Touch Dial Key (page 71)  
if communication with a certain  
remote party always requires  
this option.  
To select 14400 BPS, press:  
To select 9600 BPS, press:  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
To select 4800 BPS, press:  
FAX SPEED  
1.FASTESTPOSSIBLE  
2.14400BPS  
3.9600BPS  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
4.4800BPS  
174  
Line Monitor  
This function is used to set the  
facsimile’s speaker ON in order  
to monitor the phone line for  
one communication only. This  
function is mainly used to con-  
firm dialing and phone line sta-  
tus.  
Load the Document  
Display the LINE  
MONITOR Menu  
Select the Option  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Turn ON the monitor speaker  
by pressing:  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods or you  
may designate another option  
at this point.  
MENU  
+
You can activate this option  
when programming an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number (page 65) or  
One Touch Dial Key (page 71)  
if communication with a certain  
remote party always requires  
this option.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
+
Turn OFF the monitor speaker  
by pressing:  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
LINE MONITOR  
2.OFF  
NOTE:  
To change the default set-  
ting of this function, refer to  
page 57. The status selec-  
tion in this operation will  
take precedence over the  
default setting.  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
1.ON  
175  
Setting the Page Count  
When this function is set to  
ON, the designated number of  
Load the Document  
Display the PAGE  
NUMBER Menu  
Enter the Number of  
Document Pages  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
1
2
3
4
pages will be printed at the top  
of the recording paper at the  
remote station. This function is  
effective for a Direct Document  
Transmission only. (The total  
number of pages will be print-  
ed automatically as part of the  
TTI in Memory Transmissions.)  
Press:  
Enter the number of document  
pages (1 to 999).  
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods or you  
may designate another option  
at this point.  
MENU  
+
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
+
This setting is very helpful for  
confirming that all of the pages  
loaded into the feeder have  
been successfully sent.  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 90  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 91  
It will also assist the recipient  
to track the number of pages  
as it will add a page count to a  
the TTI at the top of your trans-  
mitted pages (i.e., 1/5, 2/5, 3/5,  
etc.).  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
PAGE NUMBER  
(1-999)  
The press:  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
[ ]  
The facsimile will compare the  
number of pages actually sent  
with the number you entered.  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
176  
Communication Report Print  
You can request a communica-  
Load the Document  
Display the TX  
REPORT Menu  
Select the Option  
Enter the Facsimile  
Number  
tion report every time a docu-  
ment is sent. If you desire a  
communication report every  
time you send a document, set  
this function to ON as a default  
(see page 178).  
1
2
3
4
Load the document face down  
in the Document Support (see  
page 82).  
Select the function key on the  
Operation Panel.  
To set the e-STUDIO170F to  
always print a communication  
report, press:  
Enter the number of the remote  
facsimile using any of the fol-  
lowing dialing methods.  
Press:  
If you plan to use communica-  
tion reports only occasionally,  
use this procedure. The TX Re-  
port key allows you to obtain a  
report for one communication  
only.  
Adjust the resolution and con-  
trast if desired (see pages 83  
and 84).  
•
•
•
•
One Touch Key Dialing  
... See page 89  
TX REPORT  
Abbreviated Dialing  
... See page 90  
To set the e-STUDIO170F to  
only print a communication re-  
port when an error condition is  
encountered, press:  
Alphabet Dialing  
... See page 91  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 100%  
AUTO RECEIVE  
TX REPORT  
1.ALWAYS  
You can activate this option  
while programming an Abbrevi-  
ated Dial Number (see page  
65) or One Touch Dial Key set-  
ting (see page 71) if communi-  
cation with a specific remote  
party always requires this op-  
tion.  
Keypad Dialing  
... See page 92  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
To set the e-STUDIO170F to  
never print a communication  
report, press:  
JAN-31 09:43 AM 80%  
ENTER TEL NUMBER  
177  
LISTS AND REPORTS - LIST AND REPORT OPTIONS SETTING  
This facsimile allows the operator to set various options regarding  
the lists and reports listed below.  
Reception Journal Settings  
Display the  
JOURNAL Menu  
Select the  
JOURNAL Option  
SET KEY DEFAULT  
Options  
1
2
3
JOURNAL  
There are two types of Journals available on the e-STUDIO170F.  
Both the Transmission Journal (TX Journal) and Reception Journal  
(RX Journal) list the 40 most recent transactions. Journals can be  
printed either Automatically or Manually. When manually printed,  
Press:  
To configure the type of Jour-  
Select the desired option.  
JOURNAL  
MENU  
nal to print when  
press:  
is used,  
To print both TX and RX Jour-  
JOURNAL  
JOURNAL  
must be pressed. To select the type of Journal to print when  
+
nals when  
is used, press:  
JOURNAL  
is pressed, complete manual Journal printing discussed in  
+
this section.  
+
+
+
SET KEY DEFAULT  
1.SEND & RECEIVE  
To print only a TX Journal  
COMMUNICATION REPORT  
JOURNAL  
Communication Report allows you to print a report after every  
transmission. Reports can be printed automatically or manually.  
When printing automatically, you can designate to print a report for  
every transmission or only when an error has occurred during the  
transmission.  
when  
is used, press:  
2.SEND  
3.RECEIVE  
Go to Step 3.  
In addition, Communication Report allows you to further select the  
option of printing the first page image of the fax document on the  
report to facilitate identification.  
To print only a RX Journal  
JOURNAL  
when  
is used, press:  
To set automatic printing,  
press:  
JOURNAL  
01.SET KEY DEFAULT  
To setup the Communication Report, go to page 178 to 185.  
+
02.AUTO PRINT  
RECEPTION LIST  
The e-STUDIO170F will print a reception list under the following  
conditions:  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to con-  
firm your selection.  
AUTO PRINT  
1.ON  
•
•
Reservation to Local Mailbox  
When reserving a document to a Mailbox within the e-  
STUDIO170F locally, a reception list is printed.  
2.OFF  
COMPLETED  
Go to Step 4.  
Remote Mailbox  
When reserving a document to a Mailbox within the e-  
STUDIO170F remotely from another facsimile, a reception list  
is printed on the e-STUDIO170F.  
STOP  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
178  
Reception Journal Settings - continued  
AUTO PRINT  
Options  
4
Press the following key to  
setup automatic printing of the  
TX and RX Journals whenever  
40 transactions have taken in  
place.  
To turn ON Automatic printing  
of journal, press:  
To turn OFF Automatic printing  
of journal, press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to con-  
firm your selection.  
COMPLETED  
STOP  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
179  
Direct Transmission Report Setting  
Display the TX  
REPORT Menu  
Select the Option for  
TX REPORT  
1
2
Select the desired printing op-  
tion for non-memory, direct  
transmissions.  
Press:  
MENU  
+
To ALWAYS print a Transmis-  
sion Report whenever a docu-  
ment is transmitted, press:  
+
+
+
+
+
To only print a Transmission  
Report when an error occurrs,  
press:  
To turn OFF automatic printing  
of Transmission Reports,  
press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to con-  
firm your selection.  
TX REPORT  
1.ALWAYS  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
COMPLETED  
STOP  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
180  
Memory Transmission Report Setting  
Display the  
MEMORY TX  
Menu  
Select the Option for MEMORY TX  
Set the Option for  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
1
2
3
Press:  
Select the desired printing op-  
tion for single location memory  
transmissions.  
To turn OFF automatic printing  
of Transmission Reports,  
press:  
To print a first page image of  
the document on the Transmis-  
sion Report, press:  
MENU  
+
To ALWAYS print a Transmis-  
sion Report whenever a docu-  
ment is transmitted, press:  
+
+
+
+
+
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to confirm  
your selection.  
To not print a first page image  
of the document on the Trans-  
mission Report, press:  
To only print a Transmission  
Report when an error occurrs,  
press:  
COMPLETED  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to con-  
firm your selection.  
STOP  
Press  
to complete this  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
2.OFF  
setting.  
COMPLETED  
1.ON  
STOP  
Go to Step 3.  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
MEMORY TX  
1.ALWAYS  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
181  
Multi-Address Report Setting  
Display the  
Select the Option for MULTI-ADD REPORT  
Set the Option for  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
1
2
3
MULTI-ADD  
REPORT Menu  
Press:  
Select the desired option for  
Multi-address Transmission Re- of Transmission Reports,  
ports.  
To turn OFF automatic printing  
To print a first page image of  
the document on the transmis-  
sion report, press:  
MENU  
press:  
+
To ALWAYS print a Transmis-  
sion Report whenever a docu-  
ment is transmitted, press:  
+
+
+
+
+
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to confirm  
your selection.  
To not print a first page image  
of the document on the trans-  
mission report, press:  
To only print a Transmission  
Report when an error occurs,  
press:  
COMPLETED  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to con-  
firm your selection.  
STOP  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
1.ON  
COMPLETED  
2.OFF  
STOP  
Press  
to complete this  
Go to Step 3.  
MULTI-ADDREPORT  
1.ALWAYS  
setting.  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
182  
Multi-Polling Report Setting  
Display the  
MULTI POLL  
REPORT Options  
1
2
MULTI POLL  
REPORT Menu  
Press:  
Select the desired option for  
Multi-polling Reports.  
MENU  
To ALWAYS print a report  
whenever a polling operation  
occurs, press:  
+
+
+
+
+
+
To only print a report when an  
error occurrs, press:  
To turn OFF automatic printing  
of this report, press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to con-  
firm your selection.  
MULTIPOLLREPORT  
1.ALWAYS  
COMPLETED  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
STOP  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
183  
Relay Originator Report Setting  
Display the RELAY  
ORIGINATOR Menu  
Select the Option for RELAY ORIGINATOR  
Set the Option for  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
1
2
3
Press:  
Select the desired option to  
print a report whenever a Relay  
transmission is sent.  
To turn OFF Automatic printing  
of reports, press:  
To print a first page image of  
the document on the transmis-  
sion report, press:  
MENU  
+
NOTE:  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to confirm  
your selection.  
This is only applicable if the  
e-STUDIO170F is used as  
an Originator for a relay  
transmission (see page  
117).  
+
+
+
+
+
To not print a first page image  
of the document on the trans-  
mission report, press:  
COMPLETED  
To ALWAYS print a report  
whenever a document is trans-  
mitted, press:  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to con-  
firm your selection.  
STOP  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
To only print a report when an  
error occurs, press:  
COMPLETED  
STOP  
Press  
to complete this  
RELAYORIGINATOR  
1.ALWAYS  
SHOW FIRST PAGE  
1.ON  
setting.  
2.ON ERROR  
3.OFF  
2.OFF  
Go to next step.  
184  
Reception List Settings  
Display the  
RECEPTION LIST  
Menu  
Select the Job for  
RECEPTION LIST  
LOCAL MAILBOX  
LIST  
REMOTE MAILBOX  
LIST  
1
2
3
4
Press:  
Select the desired option.  
When “01.LOCAL MAILBOX” is  
selected in Step 2, the follow-  
ing screen displays.  
When “02.REMOTE MAILBOX”  
is selected in Step 2, the fol-  
lowing screen displays.  
MENU  
To select the LOCAL MAIL-  
BOX, press:  
+
LOCAL MAILBOX  
2.OFF  
REMOTE MAILBOX  
2.OFF  
+
+
+
+
1.ON  
1.ON  
Go to Step 3.  
To turn ON, press:  
To turn ON, press:  
To select the REMOTE MAIL-  
BOX, press:  
+
To turn OFF, press:  
To turn OFF, press:  
Go to Step 4.  
RECEPTION LIST  
01.LOCALMAILBOX  
The following screen is dis-  
The following screen is dis-  
played for 2 seconds to confirm played for 2 seconds to con-  
02.REMOTEMAILBOX  
your selection.  
firm your selection.  
COMPLETED  
COMPLETED  
STOP  
STOP  
Press  
to complete this  
Press  
to complete this  
setting.  
setting.  
185  
- LIST AND REPORT PRINT FORMAT AND PRINTING PROCEDURE  
Transmission/Reception Journal (Communication Journal)  
Transmission/Reception Jour-  
nal shows the result of each  
communication for up to the  
past 40 transmissions/recep-  
tions.  
“TO” is replaced with “FROM”  
Facsimile/Telephone Number  
in a RECEPTION JOURNAL  
of this facsimile unit  
Time of output of this  
Machine Counter  
list or report  
List/Report Name  
Information  
Printing Procedure  
TRANSMISSION JOURNAL  
Your Station’s  
ID Name  
Auto Print (available if pro-  
grammed; see page 178):  
TIME  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
SCAN COUNT :1234 (000004D2)  
PRINT COUNT:2345 (00000929)  
DRUM COUNT :3456 (00000D80)  
Printing will automatically  
start whenever 40 transmis-  
sions (or 40 receptions) are  
completed.  
NBR. FILE NBR  
DATE  
TIME  
DURATION PGS  
TO  
DEPT NBR  
ACCOUNT MODE  
9999 G3 502 P  
STATUS  
NG 20  
Manual Print (always avail-  
able)  
001  
020  
JAN-31 14:01  
59/59  
099  
+1234567890 01  
Press:  
JOURNAL  
Date and Time the  
communication  
started  
VERY IMPORTANT:  
Remote Station’s  
Account No.  
Serial No.  
Error Code  
Up to date Activity Journals  
must be maintained by the  
user. In the event an elec-  
tronic circuit board must be  
replaced in this unit, infor-  
mation pertaining to Scan,  
Print, and Drum counters  
must be entered into the re-  
placement electronic circuit  
board. This information is  
listed at the top of every  
journal.  
Fax/Telephone Num-  
ber (“ ” an alternate  
number or sub-ad-  
dress dial was used.)  
(printed only when the  
Account Number op-  
tion is ON and used)  
(lists the trans-  
missions in the  
order they took  
place)  
Result:  
OK (successful)  
NG (failure)  
Length of each  
transaction:  
Minutes/Seconds  
P
= Polling  
SR, R = Relay Communication  
SB = Mailbox Communication  
Communication Mode  
G3 = G3  
EC = ECM  
(“ ” is 2nd line communication)  
Number of Pages  
1st  
2nd  
3rd  
(bps) (Resolution) (Mode)  
Department No.  
File No.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
2400 8x3.85  
4800 8x7.7  
7200 8x15.4  
9600  
12000 16x15.4  
14400  
MH  
MR  
MMR  
JBIG  
(indicates the depart-  
ment responsible for  
this transmission job;  
printed only when the  
Department Control  
option is ON)  
(assigned to all com-  
munication jobs at the  
time of scanning)  
-
V.34  
300dpi  
186  
Transmission Report  
This is the result report printed  
after a Direct Transmission (a  
job transmitted directly from  
the document feeder instead of  
from memory).  
TRANSMISSION REPORT  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
Auto Print (if programmed,  
see page 180):  
Printing will automatically  
start after a transmission is  
completed.  
NBR. FILE NBR DATE  
TIME  
DURATION PGS  
00/58 002  
TO  
REDFIELD H.S.  
DEPT NBR ACOUNT  
MODE  
STATUS  
NG 20  
001 020 JAN-31 14:01  
G3 512  
The print format is the same as that for the Transmission Journal on the preceding page except that the record of  
the only last transmission job is issued in a Transmission Report.  
187  
Memory Transmission Report  
This is the result report printed  
after a Memory Transmission.  
(A job transmitted after the  
document is first scanned into  
memory.)  
MEMORY TRANSMISSION REPORT  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
Printing Procedure  
Auto Print (if programmed,  
see page 181):  
FILE NUMBER  
DATE  
: 070  
Printing will automatically  
start after a transmission is  
completed.  
: JAN-31 14:18  
: REDFIELD H.S.  
: 002  
TO  
DOCUMENT PAGES  
START TIME  
END TIME  
SENT PAGES  
STATUS  
: JAN-31 14:20  
: JAN-31 14:23  
: 002  
: OK  
File Number of the transmission job  
Date and time when the job is accepted  
Remote Party’s Name or Facsimile/Tele-  
phone Number  
Number of pages input to memory  
Time when the transmission started  
Time when the transmission ended (the  
time when a Recovery Transmission is  
designated)  
Number of pages transmitted normally  
Transmission result  
188  
Reservation List  
This is a listing of the commu-  
nication jobs now reserved in  
memory.  
RESERVATION LIST  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
Manual Print  
Press:  
TX/RX  
FILE NBR FUNCTION  
PGS MAIL DATE  
TIME  
TO  
MENU  
001  
MULTI TX  
003  
JAN-30 11:55 TEL NBR:123456789012345678901234567890  
1234567890  
ABB.NBR:001 002 003 004 005 006 007  
GROUP :0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006  
JAN-30 22:50 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
OT NBR :01  
+
+
005  
009  
010  
POLLING RX  
RELAY STATION  
MULTIPOLLING  
001  
JAN-30 22:25 GROUP :1001 1002 1999  
POLL/FAX MAILBOX  
RECOVERY TX  
FILE NBR FUNCTION  
961 POLLING  
PGS  
099  
DATE  
TIME  
TO  
JAN-27 17:30  
FILE NBR FUNCTION  
PGS MAIL DATE  
TIME  
TO  
970 SINGLE TX 003  
JAN-29 14:20 123-4567  
Box Number  
(in case of Mail Box  
communication)  
Destination  
(Name or Dial Number of the  
Remote Party)  
Type of  
communication  
File Number of the  
communication  
Designated Time, or  
Time of Reception  
Number of Pages  
189  
Multi-Address Transmission Report  
This is the result report printed  
after a Multi-address Trans-  
mission.  
MULTI TRANSMISSION REPORT  
TIME  
TELNUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:JAN-31-0514:25  
Printing Procedure  
Auto Print (if programmed;  
FILENUMBER  
: 005  
see page 182):  
DATE  
TO  
DOCUMENTPAGES  
: JAN-3114:18  
: ABCDEFG  
: 015  
Printing will automatically  
start after all transmissions  
in the operation have been  
completed successfully or  
unsuccessfully.  
STARTTIME  
ENDTIME  
: JAN-3110:56  
: JAN-3114:18 (RECOVERYTIME:JAN-3114:18)  
SUCCESSFUL  
GROUP NUMBER  
0001  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
ABB. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008  
009 010  
OT  
02  
05  
ONE TOUCH NUMBER  
01  
TSRQRPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA  
12345678901234567890  
TEL NUMBER  
UNSUCCESSFUL  
GROUP NUMBER  
0002  
SENT PAGES  
AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ  
0T  
33  
AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG  
01  
Receiver where an error occurred  
SENT PAGES ... Number of pages sent normally  
Receiver where the transmission was completed normally  
190  
Multi-Polling Report  
This is the result report printed  
after a Multi-polling Reception.  
MULTI POLLING REPORT  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
:JAN-31-0514:25  
TELNUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
Auto Print (if programmed,  
see page 183):  
FILE NUMBER  
DATE  
:
:
:
:
005  
Printing will automatically  
start after all polling opera-  
tions have been completed  
successfully or unsuccess-  
fully.  
JAN-31 14:18  
JAN-31 10:56  
JAN-31 14:18  
START TIME  
END TIME  
SUCCESSFUL  
GROUPNUMBER  
0001  
(RECOVERY TIME:JAN-31 14:18)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
ABB. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008  
009 010  
OT  
02 05  
ABB.NUMBER  
014  
HONGKONGOFFICE  
TELNUMBER  
1234567890123456789  
UNSUCCESSFUL  
GROUPNUMBER  
0002  
SENT PAGES  
AABBCCDDEEFFGGHHIIJJ  
0T  
33 AAABBBCCCDDDEEEFFFGG  
01  
Receiver where an error occurred  
SENT PAGES ... Number of pages sent normally  
Receiver where the transmission was completed normally  
191  
Relay Send Originator Report  
This is the result report the  
Originating Terminal prints af-  
ter a Relay Transmission.  
RELAY SEND ORIGINATOR TERMINAL REPORT  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
Printing Procedure  
Auto Print (if programmed,  
see page 184):  
FILE NUMBER  
DATE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
009  
JAN-31 10:55  
Printing will automatically  
start after the originating  
station transmits to all of  
the assigned relay stations,  
successfully or unsuccess-  
fully.  
TO  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
015  
DOCUMENT PAGES  
START TIME  
END TIME  
SENT PAGES  
STATUS  
JAN-31 10:56  
JAN-31 14:18  
(RECOVERY TIME:JAN-31 14:10)  
015  
OK  
JOB NUMBER  
010  
192  
Mailbox Reception Report  
This is the report printed after  
a data is stored on Mailbox.  
MAILBOX RECEPTION REPORT  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZABCDEFGHIJKLMN  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
Auto Print (if programmed,  
see page 185):  
FILE NUMBER  
BOX NUMBER  
BOX TYPE  
:
:
:
:
:
999  
Printing will automatically  
start after a data is stored  
on Mailbox.  
015  
CONFIDENTIAL BOX  
005(TOTAL 999)  
DOCUMENT PAGES  
FROM  
+1234567890123456789  
Document Originator ID  
LOCAL .................. Your Own Station  
Other indication ...Remote station’s ID Name or Dial Number  
193  
Mailbox (ITU-T Compatible F-code Communication) List  
Issues a list of the documents  
reserved through the local (i.e.,  
your own) station and remote  
stations, using the Open Mail-  
box System (ITU-T Compatible  
F-code Communication).  
MAILBOX (OPEN) LIST  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
Printing Procedure  
Press:  
MENU  
BOX NBR  
TYPE  
PGS FILE NBR DATE  
TIME FROM  
12345678901234567890 CONFIDENTIAL BOX  
025  
001  
012  
099  
033  
001  
099  
111  
198  
173  
JAN-29 22:30 12345678901234567890  
JAN-30 08:17 REMOTE  
JAN-30 11:50 +811234567  
JAN-30 19:37 LOCAL  
+
+
*123##456*  
###999***  
CONFIDENTIAL BOX  
BULLETIN BOARD  
JAN-31 07:43 LOCAL  
Box No.  
Mailbox Type  
File No.  
Number of Document  
pages entered  
Date and Time the  
Document was entered  
Document Originator ID  
LOCAL .................. Your Own Station  
Other indication ...Remote station’s ID  
Name or Dial Number  
194  
Department Control List  
Available only when the Department Control Mode option is selected.  
Issues a list of Department  
Codes and data processed for  
the Department Control Mode.  
Printing Procedure  
DEPARTMENT CODE LIST  
TIME  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
Press:  
MENU  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
+
+
DEPT NBR  
NAME  
DEPT CODE  
TX PGS  
RX PGS  
COPY PGS  
01  
02  
14  
15  
20  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 12345  
123456  
296541  
88888  
6543  
1
123456  
12104  
88887  
12109  
4
123456  
99999  
988886  
450  
OPERATION CENTER  
SYSTEM DESIGN  
XYZ  
82615  
12131  
33151  
99990  
7
Department  
Name  
Department Code  
for operating the  
department  
Sent  
Received  
Copied  
Department  
No.  
Accumulated number of pages  
operated by the department  
NOTE:  
The list shown is produced when the Master code (01) is used to initiate the print list operation.  
If a user code (02-50) is used, only the data relating to that department will be printed.  
195  
Preset Dialing Number Lists  
These are listings of the preset  
All of Lists  
Abbreviated Dial Numbers,  
One Touch Keys, Multi-ad-  
dress Groups, and Alphabetical  
sort. You can request all of  
these lists (except Address  
Book List) as part of one oper-  
ation sequence or individually  
one by one.  
The following will be printed. For the print format and description  
of printed items, see the page listed below:  
Issues three lists, one after  
another, in one operation se-  
quence.  
• Abbreviated Dial Number List  
• One Touch Number List  
• Group Number List  
(page 197)  
(page 198)  
(page 199)  
Printing Procedure  
Press:  
MENU  
+
+
+
+
196  
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued  
Abbreviated Dial Number List  
Issues a list of remote station  
dialing numbers assigned as  
Abbreviated Dial Numbers.  
ABBREVIATED TEL NUMBER LIST  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
Press:  
MENU  
+
+
+
+
ABB.NBR NAME  
TELNUMBER  
TIME MONI. BPS REPORT  
001  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890  
23:45 ON  
144  
ON  
1234567  
0987654321  
SUB:12345678901234567890  
SEP:112233445566  
PWD:********************  
109  
900  
GREENVILLEOFFICE  
999999999  
09:30 OFF  
96  
OFF  
333-912345678  
Station  
Name  
Station Dial Number:  
... Alternate Dial Number  
Abbreviated  
Dial Number  
SUB, SEP, or PWD  
... Type of Sub-address  
Designated Time  
Line Monitoring  
Communication Speed  
Limit (x 100)  
TX Report Issue/Non-issue  
Status  
Attached Fax Option Status (if any)  
197  
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued  
One Touch Number List  
Issues a list of dial numbers of  
the remote stations assigned  
to One Touch Dial Keys.  
ONE TOUCH NUMBER INFORMATION  
Printing Procedure  
TIME  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
Press:  
MENU  
OTNBR  
01  
NAME/FUNCTION  
ABB./GROUP/TELNUMBER  
TIME MONI. BPS  
REPORT  
ON  
+
+
+
+
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890 23:45  
ON  
144  
1234567  
0987654321  
SUB:12345678901234567890  
SEP:112233445566  
PWD:********************  
09  
22  
35  
ABB.NBR  
GROUPNBR  
REDFIELDHS  
170  
0123  
9-1-605-1234567  
23:40  
One Touch  
Key Number  
Station Name, or  
use of the key  
Designated Time  
Line Monitoring  
Communication Speed  
Limit (x 100)  
Abbreviated Dial Number,  
Group Number, or actual  
Dial Number  
TX Report Issue/Non-issue  
Status  
... Alternate Dial Number  
SUB, SEP, or PWD  
Attached Facsimile Option Status (if any)  
... Type of Sub-address  
198  
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued  
Group Number List  
Issues a list of One Touch Key  
or Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
registered in Multi-address  
Groups or Multi-polling Groups.  
GROUP NUMBER INFORMATION  
TIME  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
Printing Procedure  
Press:  
MENU  
GROUP NUMBER NAME  
OT/ABB. NUMBER  
0001  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
OT  
01  
02  
03  
111  
121  
122  
25  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
MASAYA  
akira  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
HADANO  
Tokyo_Office  
Al_section  
+
+
+
+
ABB.  
ABB.  
1111  
1999  
COMPANIES  
AIUEOcorp.  
OT  
36  
UEO_section  
Group Number  
One Touch Key Numbers and Abbreviated Dial  
Numbers belonging to the Group:  
OT .... One Touch Key Numbers  
ABB. .... Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
Group Name  
199  
Preset Dialing Number Lists - continued  
Address Book List  
Issues a listing of names pro-  
grammed to Abbreviated Dial  
Number, One Touch Key, and  
Group Number.  
ADDRESS BOOK  
TIME  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME  
:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
Printing Procedure  
Press:  
NAME  
LOCATION  
OT 01  
ABB./OT/GROUP/TEL NUMBER  
MENU  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890  
0987654321  
+
+
+
+
SUB:09876543210987654321  
SEP:998877665544  
PWD:********************  
1234567890123456789012345678901234567890  
1234567  
BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST  
ABB. 001  
Chicago Group  
GREENVILLE OFFICE  
NEW YORK OFFICE  
GROUP 0001  
ABB. 109  
ABB. 900  
999999999  
333-912345678  
Names of Abbreviated  
Dial Number, One  
Touch Key or Group  
Number  
Station Dial Number/E-Mail Address  
....... Alternate Dial Number  
SUB, SEP, or PWD  
.......... Type of Sub-address  
OT ............ One Touch Key Numbers  
ABB. ......... Abbreviated Dial Numbers  
Group ....... Group Number  
200  
Function List  
Issues a list to confirm the  
functions currently set in this  
facsimile unit.  
FUNCTION LIST  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER:12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
Printing Procedure  
RX SETTING  
SECURE RX  
MACHINE SETTINGS  
AUTO RECEIVE MODE  
RING DELAY  
DIAL TYPE  
:OFF  
:ON  
:ON  
:AUTO  
: 2  
:MF  
MEMORY RX  
RX REDUCTION  
DISCARD  
REVERSE ORDER PRINT  
PRIVILEGED RX  
RTI  
Press:  
MENU  
:ON  
CALL NUMBER  
REDIAL MODE INTERVAL  
REDIAL MODE COUNTER  
RINGER VOLUME  
ALARM VOLUME  
:
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
: 1MIN  
: 5  
:3  
+
+
:3  
LISTS  
JOURNAL  
MANUAL  
KEY TOUCH VOLUME  
MONITOR VOLUME  
SUPER ENERGY SAVER  
PRINTER POWER SAVER  
START TIME  
END TIME  
ACCOUNT CODE  
LINE MONITOR  
RECEIVE INTERVAL  
ECM  
:3  
:3  
:MANUAL  
:ON  
:04:00PM  
:09:00AM  
:OFF  
:OFF  
: 3MIN  
:ON  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:US  
:TX & RX  
:ON  
:ON  
AUTO  
ERROR CODE  
COMMUNICATION REPORT  
DOCUMENT FEEDER TX :ALWAYS  
MEMORY TX  
MULTI ADDRESS TX  
:ALWAYS(IMAGE)  
:ALWAYS(IMAGE)  
MULTI ADDRESS POLL :ALWAYS  
RELAY ORIGINATOR :ALWAYS(IMAGE)  
RECEPTION LIST  
SORT COPY  
COPY REDUCTION  
COUNTRY/REGION  
LANGUAGE  
LOCAL MAILBOX  
REMOTE MAILBOX  
:OFF  
:ON  
:ENGLISH  
TOTAL PAGE  
SCANNER & PRINTER  
DOCUMENT MODE  
RESOLUTION  
SCAN  
PRINT  
:237  
:273  
:3017  
:STD  
DRUM COUNT  
CONTRAST  
DOCUMENT LENGTH  
PAPER SIZE  
TRAY 1  
TRAY 2  
LETTER HEAD PAPER  
:NORMAL  
:1m  
MEMORY SIZE  
ROM VERSION  
:1.5MB  
:
:
:
:LETTER  
:LETTER  
:OFF  
TX SETTING  
MEMORY TX  
:ON  
SECURITY TX  
COVER SHEET  
RECOVERY TX  
TTI  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:OFF  
:INSIDE  
:OFF  
SEND AFTER SCAN  
201  
Menu List  
Issues a list of menu items  
through which functions or op-  
tions can be set.  
MENU LIST  
TIME  
TEL NUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:JAN-31-05 14:25  
This list can be a useful guide  
during machine programming.  
1.FAX FEATURES  
1.SEND OPTION  
01.SECURITY TX  
5.DEFAULT SETTINGS  
1.MACHINE SETTINGS  
01.SPEAKER VOLUME  
01.RINGER VOLUME  
Printing Procedure  
02.ECM  
03.SUB ADDRESS COMM.  
04.SEND AFTER SCAN  
05.COVER SHEET  
06.DELAYED COMM.  
07.PRIORITY  
02.ALARM VOLUME  
03.KEY TOUCH VOLUME  
04.MONITOR VOLUME  
Press:  
MENU  
02.POWER SAVER  
01.SUPER E.S.  
08.RECOVERY TX  
09.FAX SPEED  
02.PRINTER P.S.  
+
03.DEPARTMENT CODE  
04.ACCOUNT CODE  
05.LINE MONITOR  
06.RECEIVE INTERVAL  
07.ECM  
08.SORT COPY  
09.REDIAL MODE  
10.RECEPTION MODE  
1.FAX  
2.LINE MONITOR  
3.POLLING  
01.POLLING  
02.POLLING RESERVE  
4.PAGE NUMBER  
5.SECURE RX  
6.ITU MAILBOX  
01.CONFIDENTIAL  
02.BULLETIN BOARD  
03.RELAY REQUEST  
04.SETUP & DELETE  
2.FAX/TAD  
3.TEL/FAX  
4.MANUAL  
2.LISTS  
1.FUNCTION  
11.COPY REDUCTION  
2.SCANNER & PRINTER  
2.RESERVATION  
3.DEPARTMENT CODE  
4.ITU MAILBOX  
01.DOCUMENT MODE  
02.DOCUMENT LENGTH  
03.PAPER SIZE  
5.TELEPHONE NBRS  
04.RESET DRUM COUNT  
01.ALL OF LISTS  
3.TX SETTINGS  
02.ABB NUMBERS  
01.MEMORY TX  
03.ONE TOUCH NUMBERS  
04.GROUP NUMBERS  
05.ALPHABETICAL  
02.SECURITY TX  
03.COVER SHEET  
04.RECOVERY TX  
05.TTI  
3.TEL LIST ENTRY  
1.ABB NUMBERS  
2.ONE TOUCH KEYS  
3.GROUP NUMBERS  
06.SEND AFTER SCAN  
07.SUPPLY ORDER  
4.RX SETTINGS  
4.INITIAL SETUP  
01.SECURE RX  
02.MEMORY RX  
03.RX REDUCTION  
04.DISCARD  
05.REV. ORDER PRINT  
06.PRIVILEGED RX  
07.RTI  
1.LANGUAGE  
2.DATE & TIME  
3.TERMINAL ID  
4.DIAL TYPE  
202  
Power Failure List  
This facsimile not have a bat-  
tery to back up the document  
memory contents. When the  
power is turned off (due to a  
power failure, etc.) and the  
communication data stored in  
memory is cleared, a list of the  
File Numbers of those cleared  
communications will be printed.  
POWER FAILURE LIST  
TIME  
TELNUMBER :12345678901234567890  
NAME :ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ12345678901234  
:JAN-31-0514:25  
TX/RX  
FILENBR FUNCTION  
Printing Procedure  
001  
005  
006  
010  
MULTITX  
POLLINGRX  
PRG.CONTPOLL  
MULTIPOLLING  
This list is automatically print-  
ed after recovery from a power  
failure event.  
POLLING/FAXM-BOX/MAILBOX  
FILENBR FUNCTION  
MAIL  
FROM  
DATE  
TIME  
101  
106  
107  
POLLING  
LOCAL  
JAN-30  
JAN-31  
JAN-31  
11:23  
07:55  
07:55  
CONFIDENTIALBOX  
BULLETINBOARD  
*1234567890#12345678 9999999999999  
###***#123#999*  
LOCAL  
FROM  
MEMORYRECEPTION  
RECOVERYTX  
FILENBR  
222  
DATE  
TIME  
*1234567890123456789 JAN-30  
21:37  
FILENBR FUNCTION  
333  
SINGLETX  
Type of  
communication  
Station where the  
communication or the  
Mail Box is input  
Time of Input  
Box Number  
File Number of the  
communication  
(in case of Mail Box  
communication)  
203  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Error Messages  
If an abnormal condition arises  
Error Message  
Cause / Solution  
Error Message  
Cause / Solution  
in the facsimile or an incorrect  
operation is performed, an  
alarm buzzer is generated for  
about 4 seconds and a mes-  
sage to indicate the nature of  
the error appears in the LCD  
window. In that case, take cor-  
rective action according to the  
following table.  
Autodialer numbers and initial  
settings have been lost (due to  
a long period without power or a  
depleted backup battery).  
The maximum number of manu-  
ally input phone numbers (100)  
has been reached.  
BROKEN REGISTRATION  
JOB MEMORY FULL  
Split your transmission into two  
or more jobs.  
STOP  
Press  
to restore the idle  
MEMORY OVERFLOW  
There is not enough memory to  
perform the requested opera-  
tion.  
state. If this Error Message is  
repeatedly displayed, machine  
programming has become cor-  
rupted. The machine must be  
re-initiatized by a trained techni-  
cian. Call for service.  
STOP  
Press  
to cancel the mes-  
sage. Do the operation over  
again with the Direct Document  
Transmission, or do the opera-  
tion again when enough residual  
memory is regained.  
A power failure occurred during  
a communication, etc. The con-  
tents of memory were cleared  
due to a long power-off condi-  
tion.  
POWER FAILURE  
A document jam has occurred.  
DOCUMENT JAM  
A Power Failure List is printed.  
Confirm the list contents (see  
page 203).  
Remove the jammed document  
(see page 210).  
A recording paper jam has oc-  
curred or paper size is mis-  
match.  
PAPER SIZE ERROR OR  
PAPER JAM XX  
The RX cover is open or no  
Toner Cartridge and Drum Unit  
exists.  
RX COVER OPEN OR NO  
PROCESS UNIT  
Remove the jammed paper or  
change the setting to select the  
current paper size (see pages  
21, 206, 211).  
Firmly close the top cover or  
install the Toner Cartridge and  
Drum Unit.  
The memory set aside for  
speed dial numbers (i.e. One  
Touch Keys and Abbreviated  
Dial Numbers) has been ex-  
hausted.  
No paper exists in the upper pa-  
per tray. This error occurs with  
an optional paper tray installed.  
MEMORY FULL  
UPPER PAPER EMPTY  
Supply recording paper to the  
upper paper tray.  
Delete unneed numbers, alter-  
nate numbers, and unnecessary  
pauses. Use shorter names for  
the dialing addresses.  
204  
Error Messages - continued  
Error Message  
Error Message  
Cause / Solution  
Cause / Solution  
LOWER PAPER EMPTY  
CHECK TELEPHONE  
LINE  
No paper exists in the lower pa-  
per tray. This error occurs with  
an optional paper tray installed.  
Line is not connected to the  
telephone line.  
Correctly connect a modular  
phone cord between the tele-  
phone line jack and the LINE  
connector on the rear side of  
the machine (see page 10).  
Supply recording paper to the  
lower paper tray.  
PAPER EMPTY  
No recording paper exists in any  
paper tray.  
DEVICE ERROR XX  
A printer system failure has oc-  
curred.  
Supply recording paper to the  
paper tray(s).  
Power your machine off, then  
back on. If the error condition is  
cleared, confirm normal opera-  
tion. If the error condition re-  
turns, call your service repre-  
sentative.  
TONER LOW  
The toner is nearly exhausted  
(warning).  
Replace the toner.  
The toner is exhausted.  
TONER EMPTY  
DRUM UNIT WARNING  
Replace the toner (see page  
29).  
The drum unit is approaching  
the end of its life (warning).  
Replace the drum unit (see  
page 31).  
The drum unit has reached the  
end of its life.  
REPLACE DRUM UNIT  
Replace the drum unit (see  
page 31).  
205  
Paper Jam Error Codes  
If a paper jam occurs during a reception or copying operation, the message “PA-  
PER SIZE ERROR OR PAPER JAM XX” is displayed. If this occurs, follow the pro-  
cedure below.  
The code number “XX” indicates the location of the paper jam as shown in the table  
below.  
Error  
Code  
Cause  
How to Correct  
10  
A paper jam has occurred in the  
Recording Paper Tray or Bypass  
Tray.  
Remove the jammed recording pa-  
per.  
20  
80  
A paper jam has occurred in the  
Optional Recording Paper Tray.  
Remove the jammed recording pa-  
per.  
A paper jam has occurred at the  
paper feed section of the paper  
transport path.  
Open the Front Cover, remove the  
Process Unit, and remove the  
jammed recording paper.  
90  
A paper jam has occurred at the  
paper exit section of the paper  
transport path.  
Open the RX Cover, remove the  
jammed recording paper.  
206  
Error Codes Printed on Reports  
When an Error Code is printed as a status indication on Transmission Reports, etc., refer to the following description for the applicable Error Code to determine the cause.  
Error  
Code  
Error  
Code  
Cause  
How to Correct  
Cause  
Memory Overflow  
How to Correct  
10  
Paper Empty  
Load recording paper and set the  
tray.  
42  
Wait until the memory is recov-  
ered by completing some of the  
reserved jobs or remove other  
causes if any, then retry the com-  
munication.  
11  
Recording Paper Jam  
Open the cover and clear the re-  
cording paper jam.  
12  
13  
20  
Document Paper Jam  
Cover Open  
Remove the jammed document.  
Close the cover, then retry.  
50  
53  
Line Busy  
Send the document again.  
Security Mismatch in Relay or  
Mail Box transmission  
Confirm the remote party’s securi-  
ty code, password, and your set-  
up.  
Power Failure  
Retry the transmission or ask the  
remote party to transmit the docu-  
ment again.  
B0-B5 Signal Error or Line Condition Error Retry the communication. Fre-  
C0-C4  
D0-D2  
F0, F1  
quent failures may indicate a  
phone line problem. If possible,  
move the unit to another line and  
try your communications again.  
E0  
E6  
Error relating to the printer or  
memory.  
Remove the cause of the error on  
the printer, if any. Then ask the re-  
mote party to retry the transmis-  
sion. If not corrected, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
87  
No residual memory was remain-  
ing on the remote party’s machine  
for Relay or Mailbox transmission.  
Retry the transmission.  
22  
30  
File Error due to a Directory Error  
Power the unit ON/OFF, then retry.  
Retry the transmission or ask the  
remote party to transmit the docu-  
ment again.  
STOP  
was pressed during the  
communication.  
Page # Mismatch  
Polling Error  
32  
33  
Check the actual document count.  
Check polling options setup (securi-  
ty code, etc.), and check if the poll-  
ing document exists.  
207  
Transmission Problems  
When transmissions are not performed normally, check the points in the table be-  
low. If the facsimile will not operate correctly after confirming these points or any-  
thing not listed here occurs, call your service representative.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
When document pag-  
es are fed into the  
unit, two pages are  
drawn into the slot.  
Too many document pages Set a maximum of 40 pages  
are set.  
(A4/Letter size) for one trans-  
mission sequence.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
When you place a  
document in the  
You have a machine error. Clear the error.  
Check the display for an  
The Operation Panel is not Close the Operation Panel until  
closed fully.  
it clicks at the two latching po-  
sitions.  
document tray, noth- error message (see pages  
ing happens.  
204 and 205).  
The document extension  
Tray is not fully extended.  
Extend it fully to support the  
document sufficiently.  
There is no power to the  
facsimile.  
Make sure the power plug is  
plugged into the AC outlet and  
the power switch is ON.  
Something is wrong with  
the document paper itself.  
Check the document to see if it  
satisfies the requirements (see  
page 81).  
The modular cord (the tele-  
phone line cable) is not cor-  
rectly connected.  
Check the modular cord con-  
When you press  
START  
nection between the wall socket  
The ADF pad is dirty.  
Clean the ADF pad.  
MONITOR  
in Direct  
and the facsimile. Press  
The sending proce-  
dure was completed, with a wrong side down.  
but nothing was re-  
corded on the record-  
ing paper of the re-  
ceiving party or the  
image was elongated.  
The document was loaded Load the document face down.  
and confirm you can hear a dial  
tone.  
Document Transmis-  
sion Mode, the mes-  
sage “DIALING” or  
“COMMUNICATING”  
does not appear on  
the LCD display.  
The Operation Panel is not Close the Operation Panel until  
Set the correct Dial Type in ac-  
cordance with the line used for  
the facsimile (see page 45).  
The Dial Type setting of  
the facsimile is wrong.  
closed fully.  
it clicks at the two latching po-  
sitions.  
Align the document guides  
properly (but not too tightly).  
The document is not set  
correctly in the Document  
Tray.  
Documents are  
fed obliquely  
(i.e. skewed).  
The sending proce-  
The remote party’s unit is  
Verify the remote party’s unit.  
dure was completed not compatible with yours. This facsimile can communi-  
correctly, but nothing  
happened.  
cate with G3 machines but not  
G4 machines.  
Close the Operation Panel until  
it clicks at the two latching po-  
sitions.  
The Operation Panel is not  
closed fully.  
Documents cannot  
be sent overseas.  
Poor telephone line condi-  
tions.  
Retry sending the document  
using to the “Low Speed Trans-  
mission” procedure (see page  
174).  
208  
Reception Problems  
When receptions are not performed normally, check the points in the table below.  
If the facsimile will not operate correctly after confirming these points or anything  
not listed here occurs, call your service representatives.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
The recording paper is not Check the paper installation,  
installed correctly.  
After the recording  
paper has been re-  
placed, a PAPER  
EMPTY error mes-  
sage remains on the  
LCD display.  
and make sure it is correct.  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
STOP  
Press  
to remove the  
When you are to re-  
ceive a document  
and you press  
START  
A document is still in your  
facsimile.  
document.  
The original document on  
the sending side is of poor document contents are clear  
quality.  
Ask the sending party if the  
The received docu-  
ment is difficult to  
read. Unnecessary  
lines are printed.  
enough.  
The modular cord (tele-  
phone line cable) is dis-  
connected.  
Firmly connect the modular  
nothing hap-  
pens.  
cord at both ends.  
MONITOR  
The sending unit requires  
adjustment.  
Ask the sending party to make  
a copy of the same document  
using their facsimile. If the  
quality is poor, the problem is  
in the sending party’s unit.  
Press  
and confirm you  
can hear a dial tone.  
There is no power to the  
unit.  
Check that the power plug is  
plugged into the AC outlet and  
the power switch is ON.  
The recording unit requires If a copy is made on your fac-  
cleaning.  
simile and the quality is poor,  
clean the recording unit.  
There is no recording pa-  
per.  
Load recording paper in the re-  
cording paper tray.  
The remote party loaded  
the document face up.  
Request the remote party to  
make sure that document is  
loaded correctly.  
You receive a docu-  
ment that is com-  
pletely blank, even  
though you and the  
remote party fol-  
lowed the correct  
procedures.  
The RX cover is not  
closed fully.  
Press down the RX cover until  
it clicks at the two latching po-  
sitions.  
Ask the sending party to re-  
transmit the document.  
Something is wrong with  
the sending machine.  
The recording paper  
does not come out.  
Press down the RX cover until  
it clicks at the two latching po-  
sitions.  
The RX cover is not  
closed fully.  
The recording paper tray  
is not firmly closed.  
Check the tray.  
Recording paper jam  
occurs frequently.  
Something is wrong with  
the recording paper itself.  
Use recording paper with the  
desired specifications.  
209  
Clearing a Document Jam  
If a document jam occurs dur-  
Open the Operation  
Panel  
Close the Operation  
Panel  
Remove Other  
Documents  
Remove the  
Jammed Document  
ing a transmission, the mes-  
sage “DOCUMENT JAM” is  
displayed in the LCD window.  
Follow this procedure to clear a  
document jam.  
2
4
1
3
Document  
Leave the power of the fac-  
simile ON.  
Remove other documents from  
the Document Support, if any  
(except the jammed portion).  
Open the Operation Panel.  
Remove the jammed docu-  
ment. Check for pieces of pa-  
per, clips, or staples which  
may have caused the failure.  
Firmly close the Operation  
Panel.  
Confirm that the LCD display  
indicates that the facsimile is  
in the Standby Mode.  
NOTE:  
As for a document that has  
jammed in the facsimile,  
make a duplicate using a  
copier and do the transmis-  
sion over again with the new  
duplicate used as the send-  
ing document.  
210  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam  
If a recording paper jam occurs  
Remove the Jammed  
Paper (Recording  
Paper Tray)  
Remove the  
Documents  
Remove the Jammed  
Paper (Bypass Tray)  
Remove the Bypass  
Tray  
during a reception or a copying  
operation, the message “PA-  
PER SIZE ERROR OR PA-  
PER JAM XX” is displayed in  
the LCD window. Follow this  
procedure to clear the jam.  
1
2
3
4
Document  
The code number “XX” indi-  
cates the location where the  
paper jam has occurred as  
shown in the table below.  
Code  
Location  
Leave the power of the fac-  
simile ON.  
Remove the jammed paper  
from the Bypass Tray.  
Remove the Bypass Tray.  
Remove the jammed paper  
from the Recording Paper Tray.  
10 In the Paper Tray and  
Bypass Tray  
20 In the Optional Paper  
Tray  
Remove any document or re-  
cording paper from the Docu-  
ment Support, Document Exit  
Tray or Recording Paper Exit  
Tray.  
80 At the paper feed area  
90 At the paper exit area  
211  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam - continued  
RemovetheJammed  
Paper(Optional  
RecordingPaperTray)  
Replace the Bypass  
Tray  
Pull Out the Optional  
Recording Paper Tray  
Insert the Optional  
Recording Paper Tray  
Open the Front Cover  
5
6
7
8
9
Replace the Bypass Tray.  
Remove the Optional Record-  
ing Paper Tray.  
Remove the stack of paper  
from the Optional Recording  
Paper Tray and remove the  
jammed paper from the ma-  
chine.  
Insert the Optional Recording  
Paper Tray all the way into the  
machine.  
Hold the Front Cover by the  
grips on both sides of its upper  
part and pull it down to open it.  
NOTE:  
NOTE:  
As the tray is inserted, lis-  
ten for the sound of the pa-  
per pressure plate moving  
up into position.  
Do not pull the Front Cover  
too strongly when opening  
it.  
212  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam - continued  
Remove the Jammed  
Remove the Jammed  
Paper  
(Paper Exit Area)  
Remove the Process  
Unit  
Remove the Jammed  
Paper (Fuser Area)  
OPEN THE RX  
Cover  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Paper  
(Paper Feed Area)  
Remove the jammed paper in  
the direction of the arrow.  
Avoid tearing the paper.  
Lift up and holding the green  
handle, gently pull out the Pro-  
cess Unit.  
If the paper is jammed partway  
through the Fuser Unit (black  
colored housing), remove the  
jammed paper in the direction  
of the arrow. Avoid tearing the  
paper.  
Open the RX Cover as shown  
above.  
Pull the leading edge of the re-  
cording paper which has been  
output in the exit.  
CAUTION:  
CAUTIONS  
Always hold the Process  
Unit by the green handle.  
•
Do no touch the image  
Transfer Roller.  
NOTE:  
•
The black colored fuser  
housing may be hot if  
the machine was in use  
prior to this paper jam.  
If a paper is jammed before  
toner on the paper is fused,  
be careful not to stain your  
hand or fingers with toner  
when removing the jammed  
paper.  
Remove the jammed paper in  
the direction of the arrow.  
Avoid tearing the paper.  
NOTE:  
It is recommended to fold  
the edge of jammed paper  
as shown in the figure when  
you remove the jammed pa-  
per.  
213  
Clearing a Recording Paper Jam - continued  
If there is any received  
document stored in  
memory ...  
Install the Process  
Unit  
Close the Front  
Cover  
Close the RX Cover  
15  
16  
17  
If a recording paper jam oc-  
curs during a reception, the  
received documents are au-  
tomatically stored in memo-  
ry. In that case, the facsimi-  
le will automatically print out  
the received contents stored  
in memory after clearing the  
paper jam (if power was not  
turned off).  
Press down on the RX Cover  
until a “Click” is heard to en-  
sure the latches engage.  
Install the Process Unit into  
the machine, aligning the  
guides of the Unit with the  
grooves inside the machine.  
Press up the Front Cover until  
it clicks to ensure the latches  
are engaged.  
Verify the display has returned  
to the Standby Mode.  
Make sure the Process Unit is  
inserted inside the machine as  
far as it will go.  
NOTE:  
Pressing in the Process  
Unit forcibly could damage  
the machine.  
214  
When the Recorded Image is not Clear...  
If the Document Scanner Unit  
is dirty, your documents may  
not be transmitted clearly. If  
the Recording Unit is dirty, the  
document you receive may not  
be clear. In that case, clean  
Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure  
Wipe the Glass  
Open the Operation  
Wipe the ADF Pad  
and Rollers  
1
3
2
Surface and White  
Plate  
Panel  
the Document Scanner Unit or  
If the problem occurs during  
Recording Unit using the fol-  
both a transmission and in  
lowing procedures. You can  
copy mode, check the Docu-  
check these problems by mak-  
ment Scanner Unit.  
ing a copy.  
If the problem occurs during  
both receptions and copy  
Examples of print problem:  
mode, check the Recording  
Unit.  
Open the Operation Panel.  
Wipe the Glass surface and  
the White Plate with a soft dry  
cloth.  
Wipe the ADF Pad and Rollers  
with a dry cloth.  
•
If it is very dirty, wipe it with  
a cloth soaked in water and  
wrung out, then wipe it with  
a dry cloth.  
•
If it is very dirty, wipe it with  
a cloth soaked in water and  
wrung out, then wipe it with  
a dry cloth.  
CAUTION:  
Be careful not to injure your  
finger(s) on the ADF spring  
when you wipe the ADF  
pad.  
215  
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... - continued  
Document Scanner Cleaning Procedure - continued  
Close the Operation  
4
Panel  
Close the Operation Panel.  
•
Make sure that the hooks  
on both sides are firmly  
latched.  
216  
When the Recorded Image is not Clear... - continued  
Recording Unit Cleaning Procedure  
Remove the Process  
Unit  
Close the Front  
Cover  
Open the Front  
Cover  
Wipe the Paper  
Pickup Roller, etc.  
Process Unit  
2
5
1
3
4
Hold the Front Cover by the  
grips on both sides of its upper  
part and pull it down to open it.  
Wipe the Paper Pickup Roller  
with a dry cloth. If the surfaces  
require moisture to remove the  
dirt, use a cloth slightly damp-  
ened with water to remove the  
dirt, followed by a dry cloth.  
Install the Process Unit into  
the machine, aligning the  
guides of the Unit with the  
grooves inside the machine.  
Press up the Front Cover until  
it clicks to attach securely.  
Lift up and holding the green  
handle, gently pull out the Pro-  
cess Unit.  
Verify the display has returned  
to the Standby Mode.  
CAUTION:  
NOTES:  
Make sure the Process Unit is  
inserted inside the machine as  
far as it will go.  
Always hold the Process  
Unit by the green handle.  
• If a problem with the Re-  
cording Unit remains after  
this action, you may re-  
quire a new Toner Car-  
tridge or Drum Unit.  
Check for dirt or paper un-  
der the Toner Cartridge  
and Drum Unit first. Call  
your service representa-  
tive for assistance.  
NOTE:  
Pressing in the Process  
Unit forcibly could damage  
the machine.  
• Do not pull the Front Cover  
too strongly when opening  
it.  
217  
USER TEST MODE - AUTOMATIC TEST MODE  
AUTO TEST  
AUTO TEST mode permits you to automatically perform a series  
of machine tests in one operation.  
Display the TEST  
MODE Menu  
Select the AUTO  
TEST Menu  
Completed the  
AUTO TEST  
1
2
3
The test items performed by the AUTO TEST are:  
Press:  
When all the tests end, the  
word “OPERATION COM-  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and a Test Pattern is  
printed. After printing, the dis-  
play returns to showing the  
standby mode screen.  
Press:  
MENU  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
FLASH ROM TEST  
Checks the program data, function data, and language data.  
+
SRAM TEST  
Checks the SRAM Memory.  
The auto test starts, appears  
on the screen indicating that  
the test is under way.  
DRAM TEST  
Checks the DRAM Memory.  
The results of the auto test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
port, refer to “PRINTING A  
MODEM TEST  
Checks the modem and checks for phone line current.  
TEST MODE  
1.AUTO TEST  
AUTO TEST  
-------------------  
2.INDIVIDUALTEST  
SCANNER TEST  
Checks the image scanner.  
TEST RESULT” on page 230.  
3.TEST RESULT LIST  
If the result of the auto test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
CODEC TEST  
Checks the CODEC IC.  
AUTO TEST  
---------------  
PRINTER TEST  
Checks the printer components for proper operation and prints  
one test page.  
To suspend the auto test,  
STOP  
press  
.
•
TONER IC TEST  
Checks the TONER IC.  
NOTE: AUTO TEST cannot be performed if data (such as re-  
ceived data, delayed transmission, or polling data) is  
stored in memory.  
218  
- INDIVIDUAL TEST MODE  
INDIVIDUAL TEST Summary  
In INDIVIDUAL TEST mode,  
you can perform specific tests  
on this facsimile.  
Select the Desired  
INDIVIDUAL TEST  
(01-07)  
Enter the INDIVIDUAL  
TEST Menu  
1
2
MENU  
Press:  
MENU  
Press  
or  
un-  
til the desired INDIVIDUAL  
+
TEST is displayed or enter the  
desired INDIVIDUAL TEST (01  
through 08) using the dial key-  
pad.  
+
INDIVIDUALTEST  
01.ADF TEST  
02.KEY TEST  
03.LED TEST  
04.LCD TEST  
05.SPEAKERTEST  
06.SENSOR TEST  
07.PRINT TEST  
08.TONER IC TEST  
NOTE:  
Only 1 selection can be dis-  
played at one time.  
219  
ADF TEST  
The ADF test checks the op-  
eration of the ADF by trans-  
porting and unloading docu-  
ments. You can check that the  
ADF is normal if the number of  
documents loaded is consis-  
tent with the number of docu-  
ments transported and un-  
loaded.  
Select the ADF TEST  
Menu  
Select the ADF Test  
Result  
Load the Documents  
1
3
2
Press:  
If a document jam occurs dur-  
ing transport, the screen below  
is displayed.  
Load the documents in the  
document support.  
If the number of documents  
loaded is consistent with the  
number of documents unload,  
press:  
MENU  
+
ADF TEST  
PRESS[START]  
ADF TEST  
DOCUMENT JAM  
+
+
+
Press:  
If a document has not fed prop-  
erly (even once), press:  
Remove the jammed docu-  
ments, the screen below is dis-  
played.  
START  
ADF TEST  
[STOP] TO COMPLETE  
The documents will be trans-  
ported one by one and the  
number of documents unloaded  
will be displayed at the lower  
right on the screen.  
To continue the ADF Test,  
press:  
ADF TEST  
START  
ADF TEST  
PAGES  
01  
LOAD DOCUMENT  
Return to Step 2.  
You can change the transport  
To end the test, press:  
speed by pressing  
.
STOP  
MODE  
STD:  
Fast  
Go to Step 3.  
FINE (Same when HALF  
TONE is set): Medium  
ADF TEST  
1.OK  
U-FINE (Same when HALF  
TONE is set): Slow  
2.NG  
220  
ADF TEST - continued  
Completed the  
ADF TEST  
4
The word “OPERATION COM-  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and the unit returns to  
the individual test selection  
screen.  
The result of the ADF test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
port, refer to “PRINTING A  
TEST RESULT” on page 230.  
If the result of the ADF test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
221  
KEY TEST  
The key test checks key  
switch operation on the Opera-  
tion Panel.  
Select the Key Test  
Menu  
Check the Keys  
Completed the  
4
KEY TEST  
Exit the Key Test  
Mode  
1
2
3
Press:  
Press all the key switches ex-  
Press:  
The result of the key test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
port, refer to “PRINTING A  
MENU  
STOP  
STOP  
cept  
.
+
STOP  
TEST RESULT” on page 230.  
If all the keys except  
The result of the key test  
(“OK” or “NG”) is displayed on  
the screen, and the unit re-  
turns to the individual test  
menu screen.  
If the result of the key test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
+
+
+
have been detected, the screen  
below is displayed.  
KEY TEST  
PRESS [STOP]  
KEY TEST  
OK  
STOP  
Unless  
is pressed  
within 10 seconds after the  
screen in Step 2 is displayed,  
the test result is judged to be  
NG.  
KEY TEST  
PRESS [STOP] LAST  
NOTE:  
KEY TEST  
NG  
The name of each key is  
displayed on the LCD after  
it is pressed.  
NOTE:  
STOP  
If you press  
before  
you press every key, the  
machine will reset to the  
Individual Test menu  
screen and no test result  
will be issued.  
222  
LED TEST  
The LED test checks LED op-  
eration by lighting all the LEDs  
on the Operation Panel.  
Select the LED TEST  
Menu  
Check the LCDs  
Select the Test Result  
Option  
Completed the  
4
LED TEST  
1
2
3
Press:  
Visually check that all the  
LEDs are on. After checking,  
STOP  
If all the LEDs turn on, press:  
The word “OPERATION COM-  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and the unit returns to  
the individual test selection  
screen.  
MENU  
+
press  
.
If even one LED is not lit,  
press:  
The result of the LED test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
port, refer to “PRINTING A  
TEST” on page 230.  
+
+
+
LED TEST  
1.OK  
2.NG  
If the result of the LED test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
All the LEDs blink or light with  
the following message dis-  
played.  
LED TEST  
[STOP] TO COMPLETED  
If there was no input for 1  
minute, Returns to display the  
SETUP menu screen.  
223  
LCD TEST  
The LCD test checks LCD op-  
eration by turning on and off all  
the elements of the LCD on the  
Operation Panel.  
Completed the  
LCD TEST  
Select the LCD TEST  
Menu  
Start the LCD Test  
Select the Test Result  
3
Option  
4
1
2
Press:  
Press:  
If all elements of the LCD turn  
on and off normally, press:  
The word “OPERATION COM-  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and the unit returns to  
the individual test selection  
screen.  
MENU  
START  
+
The result of the LCD test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
port, refer to “PRINTING A  
If even one element fails to  
turn on and off, press:  
+
+
+
An underline moves from the  
first column through the last  
column of the LCD, and then all  
elements turn on as shown.  
TEST RESULT” on page 230.  
A
If the result of the LCD test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
LCD TEST  
PRESS [START]  
Displayed for 5 seconds  
LCD TEST  
1.OK  
2.NG  
224  
SPEAKER TEST  
The speaker test checks  
speaker operation by changing  
the volume output from the  
speaker.  
Completed the  
SPEAKER TEST  
Select the SPEAKER  
TEST Menu  
Check the Speaker  
Volume  
Select the Test Result  
3
Option  
4
1
2
START  
Press:  
If all volumes are output nor-  
mally, press:  
The word “OPERATION COM-  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and the unit returns to  
the individual test selection  
screen.  
MENU  
Pressing  
changes the  
+
volume level from “>” (mini-  
mum) to “>>>>>>” (maximum)  
and “OFF” (no sound).  
The result of the speaker test  
can be confirmed with the self  
test report. To print the self  
test report, refer to “PRINTING  
A TEST RESULT” on page  
230.  
If even one of them is not out-  
put normally, press:  
+
+
+
>
>>  
>>>  
>>>>  
>>>>>  
>>>>>>  
OFF  
If the result of the speaker test  
is judged to be NG, call your  
service representative.  
SPEAKER TEST  
PRESS [START]  
After checking, press:  
STOP  
SPEAKER TEST  
1.OK  
2.NG  
225  
SENSOR TEST  
The sensor test checks if the  
detection sensors operate nor-  
mally.  
Select the SENSOR  
TEST Menu  
Check the Top Cover  
Check the Front  
3
Cover  
1
2
Press:  
Open the Top Cover. When its  
open state is detected, the  
screen below appears. After  
checking that the screen is dis-  
played, close the Top Cover.  
Open the Front Cover. When  
its open state is detected, the  
screen below appears. After  
checking that the screen is dis-  
played, close the Front Cover.  
The test items in SENSOR  
TEST mode are as follows:  
MENU  
+
•
•
•
Detection of Top Cover  
open/closed status  
Detection of Front Cover  
open/closed status  
+
+
+
Detects the open state  
of the Top Cover.  
Detects the open state  
of the Front Cover.  
Detection of Recording Pa-  
per and Recording Paper  
Tray presence/absence sta-  
tus  
SENSOR TEST  
CLOSE TOP COVER  
SENSOR TEST  
CLOSE FRONT COVER  
Close the Top  
Cover  
Close the Front  
Cover  
NOTE:  
When the sensor has bro-  
ken, display does not  
change next.  
SENSOR TEST  
OPEN FRONT COVER  
SENSOR TEST  
REMOVE PAPER  
But about 40 seconds  
passed, it will be set to NG.  
SENSOR TEST  
OPEN TOP COVER  
If no recording paper is placed  
in the Recording Paper Tray,  
the screen below is displayed.  
You can resume the test by  
loading the paper.  
SENSOR TEST  
PUT IN PAPER  
226  
SENSOR TEST - continued  
Check the Paper Tray  
Completed the  
5
SENSOR TEST  
4
Remove the Recording Paper  
in the Recording Paper Tray.  
When the absence of a Paper  
is detected, the screen below  
appears. After checking that  
the screen is displayed, install  
the Recording Paper in the Pa-  
per Tray.  
If an Optional Recording Paper  
Tray is installed, follow the  
same test procedure for the  
Optional Recording Paper Tray. test report, refer to “PRINTING  
A TEST RESULT” on page  
The result of the sensor test  
can be confirmed with the self  
test report. To print the self  
230.  
SENSOR TEST  
REMOVE PAPER TRAY 2  
If the result of the sensor test  
is judged to be NG, call your  
service representative.  
Detects the absence  
of the Recording Paper  
Detects the absence of  
the Recording Paper.  
SENSOR TEST  
PUT IN PAPER TRAY 2  
SENSOR TEST  
PUT IN PAPER  
Install the Recording Paper  
Install the Recording  
Paper  
The result of the sensor test  
(“OK” or “NG”) is displayed on  
the screen, and the unit returns  
to the individual test selection  
screen.  
SENSOR TEST  
OK  
227  
PRINT TEST  
The print test checks the print function by printing a test pattern.  
Select the TEST  
PRINT Menu  
Select the Print  
Result Option  
Completed the  
3
PRINT TEST  
1
2
Print Sample  
Press:  
If the test pattern prints prop-  
erly, press:  
The word “OPERATION COM-  
PLETED” is displayed on the  
screen and the unit returns to  
the individual test selection  
screen.  
MENU  
+
The result of the print test can  
be confirmed with the self test  
report. To print the self test re-  
port, refer to “PRINTING A  
+
+
+
If the test pattern did not print  
properly, press:  
TEST RESULT” on page 230.  
If the result of the print test is  
judged to be NG, call your ser-  
vice representative.  
PRINT TEST  
PRINTING LIST  
The test pattern is printed.  
PRINT TEST  
1.YES  
2.ON  
228  
TONER IC TEST  
Toner IC Test checks if the IC  
chip attached to the toner car-  
tridge can be read correctly or  
not.  
Select the TONER IC  
TEST  
Display the Test  
Result  
Completed the  
TONER IC TEST  
1
2
3
If the test result is OK.  
The result of the toner IC test  
can be confirmed with the self  
test report. To print the self  
test report, refer to “PRINTING  
A TEST RESULT” on page  
230.  
Press:  
MENU  
+
TONER IC TEST  
OK  
+
+
+
If the result of the toner IC test  
is judged to be NG, call your  
service representative.  
If the test result is NG.  
TONER IC TEST  
NG  
Press:  
Start the Toner Ic Test  
TONER IC TEST  
TESTING  
229  
- TEST RESULT  
PRINTING a TEST RESULT  
This test result list prints out the results of the individual tests as  
a self test report.  
Select the TEST  
RESULT Menu  
1
Press:  
Print Sample  
MENU  
+
+
After completion of the list out-  
put, the display returns to the  
standby mode screen.  
230  
- REMOTE SERVICE-AUTOMATIC SUPPLIES ORDER  
Automatic Supplies Order Setting  
This machine can automatically send an order sheet to a designated fax machine informing your supplier that a replacement Drum Unit or Toner Cartridge is required.  
Contact your local authorized dealer for information on this setting.  
NOTE:  
This function is not available in the United States.  
231  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Document Size:  
Power Required:  
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz  
Width ..... 216 mm (8.5 inches) max.  
148 mm (5.83 inches) min.  
Power Consumed:  
Max. 1000 W (operating), 2 W or less (standby  
in Super Energy Saver mode)  
Length ... 1000 mm (39.37 inches) max.  
100 mm (3.94 inches) min.  
Unit Dimensions:  
Weight:  
Width ..... 408 mm (16.06 inches)  
Depth..... 685 mm (26.97 inches)  
Height .... 403 mm (15.87 inches)  
(All dimensions excluding protrusions)  
Recording Paper Size:  
Letter, Legal, A4  
Recording Paper Tray Capacity: Up to 250 sheets  
(with the recommended paper)  
Less than 11.5 kg (25.35 lbs.)  
Bypass Tray Capacity:  
Effective Scanning Width:  
Effective Printing Width:  
1 sheet (with the recommended paper)  
214 mm (8.43 inches)  
208 mm (8.2 inches)  
Outer appearance, specifications, etc. may be changed without prior notice.  
If any trouble is encountered, contact your authorized TOSHIBA facsimile  
dealer.  
Compatibility Communication Modes:  
ECM, G3  
The clock function and programming data of this device are preserved with a  
built-in battery. If the power supply is cut off over a long time, the battery may  
become discharged, causing the recorded data to be lost.  
Scanning Density:  
Horizontal ..... 8 dots/mm (203 dpi),  
16 dots/mm (406 dpi)  
Vertical ......... 3.85 lines/mm (98 lines/inch)  
7.7 lines/mm (196 lines/inch)  
15.4 lines/mm (392 lines/inch)  
Transmission Rate:  
Encoding Systems:  
V17 and V.34:  
33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/  
16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps  
JBIG/MMR/MR/MH  
Recording and Printing Method: Electrophotography and Laser Printing  
Memory Capacity:  
Machine Type:  
7 MB  
Desktop type with both transmission and re-  
ception functions  
Applicable Networks:  
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network)  
232  
SUPPLIES  
HARDWARE OPTIONS  
A4-size Recording Paper:  
Letter-size Recording Paper:  
Legal-size Recording Paper:  
Drum Unit:  
Optional Paper Tray:  
FU-18L  
DK-18  
TK-18  
Toner Cartridge:  
233  
[MEMO]  
234  
INDEX  
CharacterEntry ...........................................................................................36  
Deleting ............................................................................................37  
Inserting............................................................................................37  
Replacing ..........................................................................................37  
Cleaning  
DocumentScannerCleaning .............................................................215  
RecordingUnitCleaning ....................................................................217  
CommunicationJournal...............................................................................186  
Settings ............................................................................................178  
CommunicationStatus  
Displaying Current Job Status...........................................................105  
ConfidentialBox..........................................................................................115,125  
ConfigurationSummary...............................................................................45  
ContrastSetting ..........................................................................................84  
CopyReduction ..........................................................................................64  
Copying.......................................................................................................86  
Page Sorting Function ......................................................................86  
Page Sorting Function Default Setting ..............................................60  
Paper Size For Copying ....................................................................86  
Tray Selection...................................................................................87  
Thick Paper Selection .......................................................................88  
CoverSheet  
A
AbbreviatedNumber  
Abbreviated Dial Number List ............................................................197  
CommunicationsOptions ..................................................................67  
Delete ...............................................................................................66  
Dialing...............................................................................................90  
Modify...............................................................................................66  
Registration.......................................................................................65  
Access Codes, see also Passwords, and Security Codes  
DepartmentCodeSetting ..................................................................52  
Account Codes  
Account Code Entry..........................................................................140  
Setup ................................................................................................56  
AlphabetDialing ..........................................................................................91  
Automatic Reception Mode (AUTO RECEIVE)............................................62,102  
Autodialer  
AbbreviatedDialerDialing .................................................................90  
AbbreviatedDialerRegistration .........................................................65  
AlphabetDialing ................................................................................91  
GroupNumberRegistration ...............................................................77  
OneTouchDialerRegistration ..........................................................71  
One Touch Key Dialing .....................................................................89  
Quick Start .......................................................................................34  
Address Book List ......................................................................................200  
Automatic Supplies Order ...........................................................................231  
Attaching a Cover Sheet ...................................................................168  
Printing a Cover Sheet ......................................................................168  
Registration.......................................................................................144  
D
B
Date and Time ............................................................................................40  
Default Setting ............................................................................................85  
DocumentMode................................................................................85  
ContrastLevel ........................................................................85  
Bulletin Board Box ......................................................................................115,125  
Bypass Tray ...............................................................................................9  
Installation ........................................................................................19  
PaperInstallation ..............................................................................23  
Resolution...............................................................................85  
MemoryTransmission ......................................................................93  
ReceptionMode ................................................................................62  
Security Transmission ......................................................................143  
DelayedCommunication .............................................................................170  
UsewithAbbreviatedNumberregistration .........................................68  
Use with One Touch key registration ................................................74  
DelayedPollingReception ..........................................................................170  
C
Canceling  
DirectTransmission ..........................................................................106  
MemoryJobReservation ..................................................................106  
OpenMailboxDocuments (Local Hub) ..............................................137  
Reception .........................................................................................106  
ChainDial ...................................................................................................141  
235  
DepartmentCode  
Access .............................................................................................139  
File Number and Residual Memory..............................................................93  
FrontView...................................................................................................9  
Function Keys.............................................................................................14  
Discard, see Reception Settings  
Control List .......................................................................................195  
Initialization(Setting) ........................................................................52  
Maintenance .....................................................................................54  
DepartmentControlList ..............................................................................195  
Drum Unit and TonerCartridge Installation ..................................................27  
Dial Type ....................................................................................................44  
DialingMethods ..........................................................................................89  
AbbreviatedDialing ...........................................................................90  
AlphabetDialing ................................................................................91  
KeypadDialing..................................................................................92  
On-hookDialing ................................................................................105  
One Touch Key Dialing .....................................................................89  
DirectDocumentTransmission ...................................................................95  
Default Setting ..................................................................................95  
External Off-hook Transmission ........................................................99  
On-hookTransmission(MonitorSpeakerDialing) ..............................98  
Redialing ...........................................................................................106  
ReportSetting ...................................................................................180  
TemporaryDirectTransmission ........................................................97  
Documents  
Function List ...............................................................................................201  
G
Group  
GroupBroadcastTransmission .........................................................108  
GroupNumberList ............................................................................199  
GroupNumberRegistration ...............................................................77  
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission .........................................109  
RelayTransmission ..........................................................................111  
H
HardwareOptions........................................................................................233  
I
Initial Setting  
Date and Time ..................................................................................40  
Dial Type ..........................................................................................44  
Language ..........................................................................................39  
TerminalID .......................................................................................42  
ITU-TCompatible ........................................................................................125  
Acceptable Document Sizes .............................................................81  
Document Exit Tray ..........................................................................9,15,18  
DocumentLengthSetting..................................................................149  
DocumentSupport ............................................................................9,15,18  
Loading .............................................................................................82  
DrumUnitReplacement ..............................................................................31  
J
Job Status ..................................................................................................105  
Journals, seeCommunicationJournals  
E
ECM(ErrorCorrectionMode)  
Default ECM Setting .........................................................................59  
DisablingECMTemporarily ...............................................................163  
Error Codes Printed on Reports...................................................................207  
ErrorMessages ..........................................................................................204  
K
KeypadDialing ............................................................................................92  
L
LanguageSelection.....................................................................................39  
LineMonitor  
F
Fax Speed ..................................................................................................67,73,174  
Features .....................................................................................................7  
Default Setting ..................................................................................57  
236  
TransmissionOptions .......................................................................175  
UsewithAbbreviatedNumberregistration .........................................68  
Use with One Touch key registration ................................................74  
Lists, see List and Reports  
OpenMailbox(ITU-TCompatible) .....................................................115  
Overview...........................................................................................114  
Reception List Settings .....................................................................185  
MemoryReceptionSetting ..........................................................................155  
MemoryTransmission.................................................................................93  
MemoryTransmissionReport .....................................................................188  
Memory Transmission Report Setting .........................................................181  
Menu List ....................................................................................................202  
MenuOperation ..........................................................................................35  
Multi-AddressPolling ..................................................................................123  
Multi-AddressTransmission(Broadcasting) ................................................108  
GroupBroadcastTransmission .........................................................108  
Multi-Key Quick Broadcast Transmission .........................................109  
Report ...............................................................................................190  
ReportSetting ...................................................................................182  
Multi-Key ....................................................................................................109  
Multi Mailbox Reservation ...........................................................................119  
Multi-PollingReport .....................................................................................191  
Multi-PollingReportSetting .........................................................................183  
List And Reports .........................................................................................178  
List And Report Print Format And Printing Procedure..................................186  
DepartmentControlList ....................................................................195  
Function List .....................................................................................201  
MemoryTransmissionReport ...........................................................188  
Menu List ..........................................................................................202  
Multi-AddressTransmissionReport ..................................................190  
Multi-PollingReport ...........................................................................191  
Mailbox(ITU-TCompatibleF-CodeCommunication)List ..................194  
Power Failure List .............................................................................203  
Preset Dialing Number Lists..............................................................196  
Abbreviated Dial Number List..................................................197  
All of Lists ..............................................................................196  
GroupNumberList ..................................................................199  
One Touch Number List ..........................................................198  
RelaySendOriginatorReport ............................................................192  
ReservationList ................................................................................189  
TransmissionReport .........................................................................187  
Transmission/ReceptionJournal(CommunicationJournal)................186  
Lists and Reports Options Settings .............................................................178  
CommunicationJournalSettings.......................................................178  
CommunicationReportSettings ........................................................178  
N
Notice to Users ...........................................................................................1  
O
One Touch Key  
CommunicationOptions ....................................................................73  
Delete ...............................................................................................72  
Dialing...............................................................................................89  
Modify...............................................................................................72  
One Touch Number List ....................................................................198  
Registration.......................................................................................71  
Retain ...............................................................................................72  
OperationPanel ..........................................................................................12  
Function Keys...................................................................................14  
OptionalRecordingTray..............................................................................11  
PaperInstallation ..............................................................................24  
M
Mailbox(ITU-TCompatible).........................................................................125  
Cancelling a Documents in a Mailbox (Local Hub).............................137  
Deleting a Mailbox ............................................................................127  
DeletingDocuments..........................................................................137  
Mailbox List ......................................................................................194  
Overview...........................................................................................114  
Printing a Document from a Mailbox (Local Hub)...............................135  
Reserving a Document to a Mailbox (Local Hub) ...............................131  
Retrieving (Polling) a Document from a Mailbox (Remote Hub) .........133  
Sending a Document to a Mailbox (Remote Hub) ..............................129  
Setting Up a Mailbox.........................................................................125  
MailboxCommunications  
P
PageCount .................................................................................................176  
MailboxReceptionReport .................................................................193  
237  
Paper Exit Tray, see Recording Paper  
Paper Jam Error Codes...............................................................................206  
Passwords, see also Access Code, and Security Code  
ITUSub-address ...............................................................................164  
System Password (PWD) .................................................................165  
PIN Mask....................................................................................................150  
Polling  
Overview...........................................................................................114  
PollingReception ..............................................................................114  
DelayedPollingReception ......................................................170  
Multi-AddressPollingReception .............................................123  
SecurePollingReception ........................................................121  
Simple Polling Reception ........................................................121  
PollingReservation ...........................................................................114  
Multi Mailbox Polling Reservation ...........................................119  
Security Polling Reservation ...................................................116  
SimplePollingReservation .....................................................116  
Power Failure List .......................................................................................203  
PowerSaverOperation  
ReceptionModeSelection ................................................................104  
Receiving Interval Setting ...........................................................................58  
ReceptionJournal .......................................................................................186  
Automatic Output..............................................................................178  
ManualOutput ..................................................................................178  
Settings ............................................................................................178  
Reception List Settings, see Lists And Reports Options Settings  
ReceptionSettings  
Discard .............................................................................................157  
Reduction .........................................................................................156  
ReverseOrderPrintingSetting..........................................................158  
RecordingPaper  
Installation ........................................................................................20  
Paper Size, Recording Area ..............................................................104  
Tray ..................................................................................................9,15,19  
Tray(Option).....................................................................................11  
RecoveryTransmission  
Setting ..............................................................................................145  
Transmitting(Sending) ......................................................................172  
Redialing .....................................................................................................100,106  
AutomaticRedialing ..........................................................................100  
ManualRedialingDirectTransmission ..............................................100  
Manual Redialing Jobs in Memory.....................................................101  
Redial(IntervalandCounter)Setting .................................................61  
Reduction, see Reception Settings or Copy Reduction  
PrinterPowerSaver ..........................................................................50  
SuperEnergySaver..........................................................................50  
Preset Dial Number Lists, see Lists & Reports  
Print  
PrintingSuppliesReplacement .........................................................29  
ReverseOrderPrintingSetting..........................................................158  
PrivilegedReception ...................................................................................159  
RelayTransmission  
Overview...........................................................................................111  
RelaySendOriginatorReport ............................................................192  
RelayOriginatorReportSetting .........................................................184  
RemoteService ..........................................................................................231  
Remote Terminal ID (RTI) Print ...................................................................160  
Replacement  
Q
Quick Start .................................................................................................34  
R
DrumUnit .........................................................................................31  
TonerCartridge .................................................................................29  
Reports, see Lists And Reports  
ReservationList ..........................................................................................189  
Residual Memory & File Number.......................................................93  
Resolution, Scan Setting Adjustment ..........................................................83  
RearView ...................................................................................................10  
Receiving ....................................................................................................102  
AutomaticReceptionMode ...............................................................102  
FAX/TAD Switching Mode ................................................................102  
ManualReceivingMode ....................................................................103  
Selecting Quick Start ........................................................................34  
TEL/FAX Switching Mode .................................................................103  
Reception Mode Default Setting ........................................................62  
238  
ReverseOrderPrintingSetting ....................................................................158  
RingerVolumeAdjustment..........................................................................46  
RTI (Remote Terminal ID) Print ...................................................................160  
Using with One Touch Key Registration ............................................73  
Supplies  
Automatic Supplies Order .................................................................231  
Installation ........................................................................................27  
Replacement.....................................................................................29  
S
ScanResolution..........................................................................................83  
SecurePolling.............................................................................................121  
SecureReception........................................................................................151  
Access Code Setting ........................................................................151  
Activation Period ..............................................................................153  
TemporaryStop ................................................................................161  
Security Code, see also Passwords, and Access Codes  
Polling Security Code........................................................................117  
SecureReception .............................................................................151  
Security Polling Reservation .......................................................................116  
Security Transmission ................................................................................162  
Send After Scan  
T
TerminalID .................................................................................................34  
Terminal ID Setting ...........................................................................42  
Terminal ID, Quick Start ...................................................................34  
Test Mode...................................................................................................218  
TonerCartridgeReplacement ......................................................................29  
TransmissionJournal ..................................................................................186  
Setting ..............................................................................................178  
TransmissionOptions .................................................................................162  
Attaching or Printing a Cover Sheet ..................................................168  
CommunicationReportPrint .............................................................177  
DelayedCommunication(TimeDesignation) .....................................170  
DialingwithSub-Address ..................................................................164  
DisablingECMTemporarily ...............................................................163  
LineMonitor ......................................................................................175  
LowSpeedTransmission ..................................................................174  
Priority Transmission ........................................................................171  
Security Transmission ......................................................................162  
Send After Scan Temporarily ............................................................166  
SendingRecoveryTransmission.......................................................172  
Setting the Page Count .....................................................................176  
TransmissionReport ...................................................................................187  
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................................204  
Clearing a Document Jam .................................................................210  
ClearingaRecordingPaperJam .......................................................211  
Error Codes Printed on Reports.........................................................207  
ErrorMessages ................................................................................204  
ReceptionProblems..........................................................................209  
TransmissionProblems ....................................................................208  
When the Recorded Image is not Clear .............................................215  
TTI (Transmit Terminal ID) Print..................................................................146  
TXReport ...................................................................................................68,74  
Default Setting ..................................................................................148  
Temporarily .......................................................................................166  
Setup  
Bypass Tray .....................................................................................9,15,19  
Document Exit Tray ..........................................................................9,15,18  
DocumentSupport ............................................................................9,15,18  
Facsimile Machine Installation ..........................................................17  
Printing Supplies Installation .............................................................20  
Quick Start .......................................................................................34  
Receiving ..........................................................................................34  
Recording Paper Exit Tray ................................................................9,15,19  
RecordingPaperTray .......................................................................9,15,19  
Unpacking .........................................................................................15  
UserInterfaceOperation ...................................................................35  
Simple Polling .............................................................................................121  
SimplePollingReservation .........................................................................116  
Sort Copy Setting........................................................................................60  
Specifications .............................................................................................232  
SpeedDial, seeAbbreviatedNumber  
Sub-AddressCommunication  
DialingwithSub-address...................................................................164  
UsingwithAbbreviatedNumberRegistration.....................................67  
239  
U
UserInterfaceOperation .............................................................................35  
User Test Mode  
Auto Test ..........................................................................................218  
Individual Test ..................................................................................219  
ADF Test ................................................................................220  
Key Test.................................................................................222  
LCD Test ................................................................................224  
LED Test ................................................................................223  
Sensor Test ............................................................................226  
Speaker Test ..........................................................................225  
Print Test................................................................................228  
TONER IC Test ......................................................................229  
Printing a Test Result .......................................................................230  
V
VolumeAdjustment  
AlarmTone .......................................................................................47  
BellRinger ........................................................................................46  
Key Touch Tone ...............................................................................48  
Monitor .............................................................................................49  
240  
DP-1700F  
OME04009900  

Wtb Float 100rl User Manual
Soleus Air Sg Wac 18ese User Manual
MAKITA UC4530A User Manual
LG 65TR3PJ I User Manual
HP 83480A User Manual
HITACHI CP X340W User Manual
EPSON BRIGHTLINK 450WI User Manual
DARKGLASS ELECTRONICS MICROTUBES 200 User Manual
ACER D506D User Manual
ACER CWX1139 L320 User Manual